Nokia Solutions and Networks T6BN1 CDMA Base Station User Manual IHET6BN1 Part 3 of 3

Nokia Solutions and Networks CDMA Base Station IHET6BN1 Part 3 of 3

IHET6BN1 User Manual Part 3 of 3

Preparing the LMF – continued
Mar 2001 3-17
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure 3-6: –48 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
OUT
LAN
IN
LAN
GPS
AB
AB
SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B
LFR
ALARM B 4
3A
2A
1A
6A
5A
4A
3B
2B
1B
6B
5B
4B
GND
5
6
1
2
3
TX OUT
SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B
CAUTION
LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS –48 VDC
HSO/
RX
ALARM A
EXP I/O
RGD
FRONT
REAR
FW00479
SITE I/O
RX
1
2
3
1
2
3
AB
REF
ETHERNET CONNECTORS
WITH 50–OHM TERMINATORS
RGPS 3
Using CDMA LMF
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-18
Basic LMF Operation
The CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operating
environments, which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:
SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF icon
SCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI icon
The GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operating
environment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to the
user to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit the
results of optimization and calibration actions.
Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:
SSelecting and deselecting BTS devices
SEnabling devices
SDisabling devices
SResetting devices
SObtaining device status
SSorting a status report window
For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,
refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A78.
Graphical User Interface
Overview
The LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:
SSelect the device or devices.
SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).
SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the action
taking place and other status information.
SThe status report window indicates when the the action is complete
and displays other pertinent information.
SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-19
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Command Line Interface
Overview
The LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.
Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLI
can not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.
Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only one
handler can be running at one time Due to architectural limitations, the
GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI to use
the same handler. When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI
automatically finds and uses an in–progress login session with a BTS
initiated under the GUI. This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in
the same BTS login session. If a CLI handler is already running when
the GUI is launched (this happens if the CLI window is already running
when the user starts the GUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already
running when the user starts the GUI), a dialog window displays the
following warning message:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF.
Are you sure that you want to start the application?
This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts the
application. Selecting no terminates the application.
CLI Format Conventions
The CLI command can be broken down in the following way:
Sverb
Sdevice including device identifier parameters
Sswitch
Soption parameters consisting of:
–keywords
–equals signs (=) between the keywords and the parameter values
–parameter values
Spaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and option
parameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.
Following is an example of a CLI command.
measure bbx–<bts_id>–<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5
Refer to LMF CLI Commands, R15.x 68P09251A59 for a complete
explanation of the CLI commands and their use.
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-20
Logging into a BTS
Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file is
used for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that are
provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the
correct CDF files can result in invalid optimization.
Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live
(traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.
IMPORTANT
*
Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTS
and the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into more than one BTS at a
time, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.
Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF is
properly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-2).
Prerequisites
Before attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have been
completed:
SThe LMF operating system is correctly installed and prepared.
SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.
SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computer is
connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operating system
and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer after connecting
it to the BTS (see Table 3-2 and Figure 3-2).
BTS Login from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using the GUI
environment.
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step Action
1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF is not
running).
NOTE
If a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions which
may be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:
The CLI handler is already running.
This may cause conflicts with the LMF
Are you sure you want to start the application?
Yes No
2Click on the Login tab (if not displayed).
. . . continued on next page
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-21
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure
Step Action
3If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMA
icon.
4Click on the desired BTS number.
5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).
6Enter the correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IP
Address box.
NOTE
128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI–1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP address
for MGLI–2.
7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.
8Change the Multi-Channel Preselector (from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list), normally
MPC, corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.
NOTE
When performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment is
connected to the starter frame.
9Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.
10 Click on Login.
A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.
NOTE
SIf you attempt to login to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.
SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a device
failure).
SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices can
be seen.
SIf the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen.
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-22
BTS Login from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using the CLI
environment.
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the
same BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that logout has occurred.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure
Step Action
1Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).
NOTE
If a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI session
will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.
2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:
login bts–<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>
where:
host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this is
first login to this BTS).
port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login to
this BTS).
Logging Out
Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and the
CLI operating environments.
The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to
a BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for the
same BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS in
either environment will log out of it for both. When either
a login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there is
no GUI indication that logout has occurred.
IMPORTANT
*
Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
GUI environment.
. . . continued on next page
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-23
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure
Step Action
1Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.
2Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logout pop–up message appears).
3Click on Yes or press the <Enter> key to confirm logout.
You are returned to the Login tab.
NOTE
If a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as the
GUI, a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating the system should not log out of the BTS.
When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.
4If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base
Station because the given BTS is not logged in, perform the following actions:
–Click OK.
–Select File>Exit in the window menu bar.
–Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up.
–Click Yes in the Logout Error pop–up which appears again.
5If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-24
Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI Environment
Follow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using the
CLI environment.
Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
If the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be done
with it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.
1Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:
logout bts–<bts#>
A response similar to the following is displayed:
LMF>
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
Command=logout bts–33
12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted
12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed
REASON_CODE=”No Reason”
2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:
exit
A response similar to the following is displayed before the window closes:
Killing background processes....
3
Using CDMA LMF – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-25
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Establishing an MMI
Communication Session
For those procedures that require MMI communications between the
LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-11 to initiate the
communication session.
Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communications
Step Action
1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requires the
MMI communication session.
2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its desktop
shortcut.
NOTE
If a desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from the Start
menu by selecting:
Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal><Named HyperTerminal Connection
(e.g., MMI Session).
3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressing
the LMF computer <Enter> key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained.
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
8–PIN TO 10–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
(P/N 30–09786R01)
RS–232 CABLE
8–PIN
CDMA LMF
COMPUTER
To FRU MMI port
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
Figure 3-7: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections
COM1
OR
COM2
FW00687
3
Download the BTS
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-26
Download the BTS – Overview
Before a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain device
initialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices during
manufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and data
must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTS
can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.
ROM Code
Downloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routine
maintenance nor a normal part of the optimization process. It is only
done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in the device
does not match the release level of the site operating software AND the
CBSC cannot communicate with the BTS to perform the download. If
you must download ROM code, refer to Appendix H.
Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROM
code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.
ROM code must be manually selected for download.
RAM Code
Before RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correct
RAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM
code can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Device
menu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is stored
in the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file is selected
automatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder
(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code). The RAM
code file in the code folder must have the correct hardware bin number.
RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to OOS-ROM
(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device
changes to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLI,
the LMF automatically also downloads data, and then enables the MGLI.
When enabled, the MGLI changes to INS (green).
For non–MGLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code is
downloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM
(yellow).
3
Download the BTS – continued
Mar 2001 3-27
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Download Code to Devices
Code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download starts, the device being downloaded changes to
OOS_ROM (blue). If the download is completed successfully, the device
changes to OOS_RAM with code loaded (yellow). Prior to downloading
a device, a code file must exist. The code file is selected automatically if
the code file is in the /lmf/cdma/n.n.n.n/code folder (where n.n.n.n is the
version number of the download code that matches the “NextLoad”
parameter in the CDF file). The code file in the code folder must have
the correct hardware bin number. Code can be automatically or manually
selected.
The following are the devices to be downloaded:
SSpan Configuration
–Master Group Line Interface (MGLI2)
–Slave Group Line Interface (SGLI2)
SClock Synchronization Module (CSM)
SMulti Channel Card (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC–1X)
SBroadband Transceiver (BBX)
STest Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) – if RFDS is installed
The MGLI must be successfully downloaded with code and
data, and put INS before downloading any other device.
The download code process for an MGLI automatically
downloads data and enables the MGLI before downloading
other devices. The other devices can be downloaded in any
order.
IMPORTANT
*
Follow the procedure in Table 3-12 to download the firmware
application code for the MGLI2. The download code action downloads
data and also enables the MGLI2.
Prerequisite
Prior to performing this procedure, ensure a code file exists for each of
the devices to be downloaded.
. . . continued on next page
3
Download the BTS – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-28
R9 RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a device that
has R8 ROM code and R8 RAM code must NOT be
downloaded to a device that has R9 ROM code. All
devices in a BTS must have the same R–level ROM and
RAM code before the optimization and ATP procedures
can be performed. If a newly installed R8 BTS is to be
upgraded to R9, the optimization and ATPs should be
accomplished with the R8 code. Then the site should be
upgraded to R9 by the CBSC. The optimization and ATP
procedures do not have to be performed again after the R9
upgrade. If a replacement R8 device needs to be used in a
R9 BTS, the device ROM code can be changed with use of
the LMF before the optimization and ATPs are performed
for the BTS. Refer to the Download ROM Code section. A
R9 device can not be converted back to a R8 device in the
field without Motorola assistance.
WARNING
Table 3-12: Download and Enable MGLI2
nStep Action
1 Select Util>Tools>Update Next Load function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set to the
correct code version level.
2Download code to the primary MGLI2 by clicking on the MGLI2.
–From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
–Click OK to close the status window. (The MGLI2 should automatically be downloaded with
data and enabled.)
3Download code and data to the redundant MGLI2 but do not enable at this time.
3
Download the BTS – continued
Mar 2001 3-29
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Download Code and Data to
Non–MGLI2 Devices
Non–MGLI2 devices can be downloaded individually or all equipped
devices can be downloaded with one action. Follow the procedure in
Table 3-13 to download code and data to the non–MGLI2 devices.
When downloading multiple devices, the download may
fail for some of the devices (a time out occurs). These
devices can be downloaded separately after completing the
multiple download.
NOTE
Table 3-13: Download Code and Data to Non–MGLI Devices
nStep Action
1Select all devices to be downloaded.
2From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.
A status report displays the result of the download for each selected device.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
After the download has started, the device being downloaded changes to blue. If the download is
completed successfully, the device changes to yellow (OOS-RAM with code loaded).
After a BBX, CSM or MCC is successfully downloaded with code and has changed to
OOS-RAM, the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.
3To download the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:
Device>Download Data
Select CSM Clock Source
A CSM can have three different clock sources. The Clock Source
function can be used to select the clock source for each of the three
inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs to
be changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clock
source options:
SLocal GPS
SRemote GPS
SHSO (only for sources 2 & 3)
SLFR (only for sources 2 & 3)
S10 MHz (only for sources 2 & 3)
SNONE (only for sources 2 & 3)
Prerequisites
MGLI=INS_ACT
CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACT
. . . continued on next page
3
Download the BTS – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-30
Follow the procedure in Table 3-14 to select a CSM Clock Source.
Table 3-14: Select CSM Clock Source
Step Action
1Select the applicable CSM(s).
2Click on the Device menu.
3Click on the Clock Source menu item.
4Click on the Select menu item.
A clock source selection window is displayed.
5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists.
Uncheck the related check box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.
6Click on the OK button.
A status report window displays the results of the selection action.
7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
Enable CSMs
Each BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typical
operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop
(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either an
on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).
The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. The GPS receiver
(mounted on CSM–1) is the primary timing reference and synchronizes
the entire cellular system. CSM–2 provides redundancy but does not
have a GPS receiver.
The BTS may be equipped with a remote GPS, LORAN–C LFR, or
HSO 10 MHz Rubidium source, which the CSM can use as a secondary
timing reference. In all cases, the CSM monitors and determines what
reference to use at a given time.
–CSMs are code loaded at the factory. This data is
retained in EEPROM. The download code procedure
is required in the event it becomes necessary to code
load CSMs with updated software versions. Use the
status function to determine the current code load
versions.
–For non–RGPS sites only, verify the CSM configured
with the GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in
the CSM–1 slot before continuing.
–The CSM(s) and MCC(s) to be enabled must have
been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM)
and data.
IMPORTANT
*
. . . continued on next page
3
Download the BTS – continued
Mar 2001 3-31
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Follow the procedure in Table 3-15 to enable the CSMs.
Table 3-15: Enable CSMs
nStep Action
1Verify the CSM(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.
2Click on the target CSM.
From the Device pull down, select Enable.
NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 first and then CSM–1.
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
Click OK to close the status window.
NOTE
FAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in
the Description field, the CSM changes to the enabled state after phase lock is achieved. CSM–1
houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour to complete.
* IMPORTANT
The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and
operated by the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters
satellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS
contains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.
If an installed GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to one
hour for the GPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.
Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position
fix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in-service. (In some cases, the GPS
receiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load.)
3NOTE
If equipped with two CSMs, the LMF should display CSM-1 as bright GREEN (INS–ACT) and
CSM–2 as dark green (INS–STB). After the CSMs have been successfully enabled, the
PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green (alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).
If more than an hour has passed, refer to Table 3-19 and Table 3-20 to determine the cause.
3
Download the BTS – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-32
Enable MCCs
This procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”
parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,
but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in the
BTS (approximately 3 ms).
Follow the procedure in Table 3-16 to enable the MCCs.
The MGLI2, and primary CSM must be downloaded and
enabled (IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), before downloading and
enabling the MCC.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 3-16: Enable MCCs
nStep Action
1Verify the MCC(s) have been downloaded with code (Yellow, OOS–RAM) and data.
2Select the MCCs to be enabled or from the Select pulldown menu choose All MCCs.
3From the Device menu, select Enable
A status report confirms change in the device(s) status.
4Click on OK to close the status report window.
Enable Redundant GLIs
Follow the procedure in Table 3-17 to enable the redundant GLI(s).
Table 3-17: Enable Redundant GLIs
nStep Action
1Select the target redundant GLI(s).
2From the Device menu, select Enable.
A status report window confirms the change in the device(s) status and the enabled GLI(s) is
green.
3Click on OK to close the status report window.
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification
Mar 2001 3-33
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
CSM & LFR Background
The primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)
boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM in
slot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy. The
CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using the remote
GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in the antenna head
that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can have a daughter
card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.
The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1
and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution
Cards (CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608
MHz clocks. CCD–1 is married to CSM–1 and CCD–2 is married to
CSM 2. A failure on CSM–1 or CCD–1 cause the system to switch to
redundant CSM–2 and CCD–2.
In a typical operation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked
Loop (DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by
either an on–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver
(R–GPS). The CSM2 card is required when using the R–GPS. DPLL
circuits employed by the CSM provide switching between the primary
and redundant unit upon request. Synchronization between the primary
and redundant CSM cards, as well as the LFR or HSO back–up source,
provides excellent reliability and performance.
Each CSM board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides
19.6608 MHz clock, even second tick reference, and 3 MHz sinewave
reference, referenced to the selected synchronization source (GPS,
LORAN–C Frequency Receiver (LFR), or High Stability Oscillator
(HSO), T1 Span, or external reference oscillator sources). The 3 MHz
signals are also routed to the RDM EXP 1A & 1B connectors on the top
interconnect panel for distribution to co–located frames at the site.
Fault management has the capability of switching between the GPS
synchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event of
a GPS receiver failure on CSM–1. During normal operation, the CSM–1
board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The source
selection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.
All boards are mounted in the C–CCP shelf at the top of the BTS frame.
Figure 3-9 on page 3-36 illustrates the location of the boards in the BTS
frame. The diagram also shows the CSM front panel.
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-34
Low Frequency Receiver/
High Stability Oscillator
The CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoring
functions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO is
capable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPS
reference signal.
The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RF
signals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which is
synchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. The
LFR can maintain system time indefinitely after initial GPS lock.
The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessary
interface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in those
geographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since the
HSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintained
for 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.
Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOX
LFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to the
expansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logical
frames require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has
an LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame
and interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and
LFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-18).
HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection
(see Table 3-18).
Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for
60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM
board warm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and
oscillator frequency to stabilize prior to test. Test
equipment warm-up allows the Rubidium standard
timebase to stabilize in frequency before any measurements
are made.
NOTE
Front Panel LEDs
The status of the LEDs on the CSM boards are as follows:
SSteady Green – Master CSM locked to GPS or LFR (INS).
SRapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSM locked to GPS or LFR
(STBY).
SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSM OOS–RAM attempting
to lock on GPS signal.
SRapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. Trouble
Notifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Mar 2001 3-35
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Null Modem Cable
A null modem cable is required. It is connected between the LMF
COM1 port and the RS232–GPIB Interface box. Figure 3-8 shows the
wiring detail for the null modem cable.
Figure 3-8: Null Modem Cable Detail
5
3
2
7
8
1
4
6
GND
RX
TX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
GND
TX
RX
RTS
CTS
RSD/DCD
DTR
ON BOTH CONNECTORS
SHORT PINS 7, 8;
SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 6
9–PIN D–FEMALE 9–PIN D–FEMALE
5
2
3
7
8
1
4
6
DSR DSR
FW00362
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
SThe LMF is NOT logged into the BTS.
SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
CSM Frequency Verification
The objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSM
boards before performing the rf path verification tests. Parts of this
procedure will be repeated for final verification after the overall
optimization has been completed.
Test Equipment Setup: GPS &
LFR/HSO Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment while
referring to Figure 3-9 as required.
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step Action
1Perform one of the following operations:
–For local GPS (RF–GPS), verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM
slot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.
–For Remote GPS (RGPS), verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 is
INS
NOTE
This is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC (or subsequent).
2Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem
board) to the MMI port on CSM–1.
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-36
Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)
Step Action
3Reinstall CSM–2.
4Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5)
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
5When the terminal screen appears, press the <Enter> key until the CSM> prompt appears.
Figure 3-9: CSM MMI terminal connection
NULL MODEM
BOARD
(TRN9666A)
RS–232 SERIAL
MODEM CABLE
DB9–TO–DB25
ADAPTER
COM1
LMF
NOTEBOOK
FW00372
CSM board shown
removed from frame
19.6 MHZ TEST
POINT REFERENCE
(NOTE 1)
EVEN SECOND
TICK TEST POINT
REFERENCE
GPS RECEIVER
ANTENNA INPUT
GPS RECEIVER
MMI SERIAL
PORT
ANTENNA COAX
CABLE
REFERENCE
OSCILLATOR
9–PIN TO 9–PIN
RS–232 CABLE
NOTES:
1. One LED on each CSM:
Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVE
Fast Flashing Green = OOS–RAM
Red = Fault Condition
Flashing Green & Red = Fault
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Mar 2001 3-37
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
GPS Initialization/Verification
Follow the procedure in Table 3-19 to initialize and verify proper GPS
receiver operation.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.
SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board (see Figure 3-9).
SThe primary CSM and HSO (if equipped) have been warmed up for at
least 15 minutes.
SConnect the GPS antenna to the GPS RF connector
ONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receiver
can result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connected
to any other RF connector.
CAUTION
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step Action
1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, and
GPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMI
command
bstatus
–Observe the following typical response:
CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.
BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000
Clock Alarms (0000):
DPLL is locked and has a reference source.
GPS receiver self test result: passed
Time since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:11
2HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.
If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified in
the database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the edit
csm csmgen refsrc command.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
–If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillator
temperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !
–If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillator
is defective
–Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-38
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step Action
3Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):
–GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.
–At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.
4Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.
gstatus
–Observe the following typical response:
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.
24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.
24:06:08
24:06:08 Recent Change Data:
24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.
24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)
24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.
24:06:08
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:
24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm
(GPS)
24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.
24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.
24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:11
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x08
24:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa8
24:06:08
24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:
24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC.
24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P
24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8
24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8
24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996
24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115
24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _
24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769
24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07
24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB
24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.
5Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):
–At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.
–GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!
–Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.
Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height reference
to Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Mar 2001 3-39
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification
Step Action
6If steps 1 through 5 pass, the GPS is good.
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:
–If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked and
visible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site has
been entered into CDF file).
–If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed”, position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to be
accurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.
–The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
–GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to the
shield.
–There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frame
GPS input.
–Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.
7Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPS
acquisition has taken place.
debug dpllp
Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application of
power) (If warmed–up proceed to step 8)
CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.
DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.
NOTE
The warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but the
reference oscillator will be unstable.
8Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.
c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175
c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175
9Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):
–Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).
–Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).
–TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.
10 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.
debug dpllp
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-40
LFR Initialization/Verification The LORAN–C LFR is a full size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.
The LFR is a completely self-contained unit that interfaces with the
CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM handles the overall
configuration and status monitoring functions of the LFR.
The LFR receives a 100 kHz, 35 kHz BW signal from up to 40 stations
(8 chains) simultaneously and provides the following major functions:
SAutomatic antenna pre-amplifier calibration (using a second
differential pair between LFR and LFR antenna)
SA 1 second ±200 ηs strobe to the CSM
If the BTS is equipped with an LFR, follow the procedure in Table 3-20
to initialize the LFR and verify proper operation as a backup source for
the GPS.
If CSMRefSrc2 = 2 in the CDF file, the BTS is equipped
with an LFR. If CSMRefSrc2 = 18, the BTS is equipped
with an HSO.
NOTE
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Mar 2001 3-41
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification
Step Action Note
1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in tracking
mode. A typical response is:
CSM> lstatus <cr>
LFR St ti St t
LFR Station Status:
Clock coherence: 512 >
5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:
5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:
5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Fl
This must be greater
than 100 before LFR
becomes a valid source.
7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:
7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >
7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:
7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E
7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag
This shows the LFR is
locked to the selected
PLL station.
8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:
8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:
8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:
8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:
8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:
8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Fl
ag:
8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:
8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Fl
g
9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:
9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:
9610W 47
/
49 dB –4S
/
N Fla
g
:E
9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E
9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E
9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag
9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:
9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S
9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E
9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E
9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E
9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:
9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Fl
ag:
9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:
9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl
9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:
LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980W
LFR Recent Change Data:
Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >
PLL GRI: 7980W
LFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.
CSM>
This search list and PLL
data must match the
configuration for the
geographical location
of the cell site.
. . . continued on next page
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-42
Table 3-20: LFR Initialization/Verification
Step NoteAction
2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):
–Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).
–Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Z
assignment.
–Verify the signal to noise (S/N) ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.
3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.
–Observe the following typical response.
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes
1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes
2 Not used
Current reference source number: 1
4 LORAN–C LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source
(verified from left to right).
* IMPORTANT
If any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:
–The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.
–The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m
(300 ft) in length.
–A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.
–The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .
NOTE
LFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use the
underlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.
5Close the Hyperterminal window.
3
CSM System Time/GPS and LFR/HSO Verification – continued
Mar 2001 3-43
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
HSO Initialization/Verification
The HSO module is a full–size card that resides in the C–CCP Shelf.
This completely self contained high stability 10 MHz oscillator
interfaces with the CSM via a serial communications link. The CSM
handles the overall configuration and status monitoring functions of the
HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the HSO is capable of maintaining
synchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal for a
limited time.
The HSO is typically installed in those geographical areas not covered
by the LORAN–C system and provides the following major functions:
SReference oscillator temperature and phase lock monitor circuitry
SGenerates a highly stable 10 MHz sine wave.
SReference divider circuitry converts 10 MHz sine wave to 10 MHz
TTL signal, which is divided to provide a 1 PPS strobe to the CSM.
Prerequisites
SThe LMF is not logged into the BTS.
SThe COM1 port is connected to the MMI port of the primary CSM via
a null modem board.
SThe primary CSM and the HSO (if equipped) have warmed up for 15
minutes.
If the BTS is equipped with an HSO, follow the procedure in Table 3-21
to configure the HSO.
Table 3-21: HSO Initialization/Verification
Step Action
1At the BTS, slide the HSO card into the cage.
NOTE
The LED on the HSO should light red for no longer than 15-minutes, then switch to green. The CSM
must be locked to GPS.
2On the LMF at the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.
–Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:
Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 0 0 Yes
1 HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxx –69532 Yes
2 Not used
Current reference source number: 0
When the CSM is locked to GPS, verify that the HSO “Good” field is Yes and the “Valid” field is Yes.
3If source “1” is not configured as HSO, enter at the CSM> prompt: ss 1 12 <cr>
Check for Good in the Status field.
4At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr>.
Verify the HSO valid field is Yes. If not, repeat this step until the “Valid” status of Yes is returned. The
HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO Rubidium
oscillator is fully warmed.
3
Test Equipment Set–up
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-44
Connecting Test Equipment to
the BTS
All test equipment is controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus.
The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory set
GPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMF
and any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses have
been set correctly (normally 13 for a power meter and 18 for a CDMA
analyzer).
The following equipment is required to perform optimization:
SLMF
STest set
SDirectional coupler and attenuator
SRF cables and connectors
Refer to Table 3-22 for an overview of connections for test equipment
currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see the following figures:
SFigure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
SFigure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
SFigure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show typical TX and RX ATP setup with
a directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).
Supported Test Sets
Optimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of the
following test sets:
SCyberTest
SAdvantest R3465 and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
SHewlett–Packard HP 8935
SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface for
1.7/1.9 GHz) and HP 437B or Gigatronics Power Meter
SSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optional
SRubidium Standard Timebase – optional
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test
connections must be through the directional coupler and
in-line attenuator as shown in the test setup illustrations.
CAUTION
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Mar 2001 3-45
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Test Equipment Reference
Chart
Table 3-22 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorola
standards.
To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presently
being used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.
Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable to
that port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),
reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.
Table 3-22: Test Equipment Setup
TEST SETS ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENT
SIGNAL Cyber–
Test Ad-
vantest HP
8935 HP
8921A
HP
8921
W/PCS Power
Meter
GPIB
Inter-
face LMF Directional
Coupler & Pad* BTS
EVEN SECOND
SYNCHRONIZATION EVEN
SEC REF EVEN SEC
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
EVEN
SECOND
SYNC IN
19.6608 MHZ
CLOCK TIME
BASE IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN EXT
REF IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CDMA
TIME BASE
IN
CONTROL
IEEE 488 BUS IEEE
488 GPIB HP–IB HP–IB GPIB SERIAL
PORT
HP–IB HP–IB
TX TEST
CABLES RF
IN/OUT INPUT
50–OHM RF
IN/OUT TX1–6
RF
IN/OUT RF
IN/OUT 20 DB
PAD BTS
PORT
RX TEST
CABLES RF GEN
OUT RF OUT
50–OHM DUPLEX RX1–6
DUPLEX
OUT RF OUT
ONLY
SYNC
MONITOR
FREQ
MONITOR
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-46
Equipment Warm-up
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,
hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts as
warm-up time.)
IMPORTANT
*
Calibrating Cables
Figure 3-10 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported test
sets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input and
output ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for each
test.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS
TX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBX
channels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC
place the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under test
OOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury
and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
. . . continued on next page
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Mar 2001 3-47
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure 3-10: Cable Calibration Test Setup
Motorola CyberTest
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
Advantest Model R3465
DUPLEX
OUT
RF OUT
50–OHM
INPUT
50–OHM
RF GEN OUTANT IN
ANT
IN
SUPPORTED TEST SETS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TEST
SET
A. SHORT CABLE CAL
SHORT
CABLE
B. RX TEST SETUP
TEST
SET
C. TX TEST SETUP
20 DB PAD
FOR 1.9 GHZ
CALIBRATION SET UP
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
TX
CABLE
TX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
Note: The Directional Coupler is not used with the
Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connected
directly to the Cybertest Test Set.
A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short test
cable for cable calibration with the CyberTest Test
Set. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cable
calibration procedure, not with the test cables for
TX calibration and ATP tests.
TEST
SET
RX
CABLE
SHORT
CABLE
FW00089
Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannot
be used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
(30 DB)
N–N FEMALE
ADAPTER
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-48
Setup for TX Calibration
Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 show the test set connections for TX
calibration.
Motorola CyberTest
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
FRONT PANEL RF
IN/OUT
RF IN/OUT
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
CONTROL
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
OUT
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS
G MODE
ON
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
BTS
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
IN
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
TX TEST
CABLE
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
POWER
METER
(OPTIONAL)*
NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THE
CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY
TO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.
Advantest Model R3465
INPUT
50–OHM
GPIB
CONNECTS TO
BACK OF UNIT
* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACE
OF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TX
CALIBRATION/AUDIT
POWER
SENSOR
Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest, HP 8935, and Advantest)
REF FW00094
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Mar 2001 3-49
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A W/PCS for 1.7/1.9 GHz
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
POWER METER
TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UP
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232
NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
WITH UNUSED
PORT TERMINATED
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
2O DB PAD
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
TX ANTENNA
GROUP OR TX
RFDS
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLERS
Note: The HP 8921A cannot be used for TX
calibration. A power meter must be used.
TX
TEST
CABLE
POWER
SENSOR
FW00095
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-50
Setup for Optimization/ATP
Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections for
optimization/ATP tests.
Motorola CyberTest
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF
IN/OUT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RF IN/OUT
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
Advantest Model R3465
INPUT
50–OHM
GPIB CONNECTS
TO BACK OF UNIT
NOTE: The Directional Coupler is not used
with the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable is
connected directly to the Cybertest Test set.
RF OUT
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
OUT
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
REF FW00096
Figure 3-13: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RF
OUT
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Mar 2001 3-51
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
RF OUT
ONLY
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface
(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)
HP PCS
INTERFACE*
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNITS
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP
RX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
TX ANTENNA
PORT OR RFDS
RX ANTENNA
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
OUT
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RX
TEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
100–WATT (MIN)
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
2O DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
EVEN
SECOND/SYNC
IN (BNC “T”
WITH 50 OHM
TERMINATOR)
CDMA
TIMEBASE
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
RF
IN/OUT
Figure 3-14: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A
REF FW00097
GPIB
CONNECTS
TO BACK OF
UNIT
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A
(for 800 MHz)
* FOR 1700 AND
1900 MHZ ONLY
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
RF
IN/OUT
RF OUT
ONLY
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-52
Figure 3-15: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
OUTPUT
PORT
RVS (REFLECTED)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATION
FWD
(INCIDENT)
PORT
BTS INPUT
PORT TX TEST
CABLE
ONE 20 DB 20 W IN LINE
ATTENUATOR
Connect TX test cable between
the directional coupler input port
and the appropriate TX antenna
directional coupler connector.
TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RX
(RFM TX)
TX
(RFM RX)
COBRA RFDS Detail
1
23
RF FEED LINE TO
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
REMOVED
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IN
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
TX
TEST
CABLE
TX RF FROM BTS FRAME
TEST
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES. FW00116
3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued
Mar 2001 3-53
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure 3-16: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)
RX RF FROM BTS
FRAME
3
4
1
2
5
6
Connect RX test cable between
the test set and the appropriate
RX antenna directional coupler.
RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
RF FEED LINE TO
TX ANTENNA
REMOVED
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
RFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLER
OUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)
ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORS
RX
(RFM TX)
TX
(RFM RX)
COBRA RFDS Detail
OUT
Appropriate test sets and the port
names for all model test sets are
described in Table 3-22.
RX Test
Cable
NOTE:
THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTH
STARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.
FW00115
3
Test Set Calibration
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-54
Test Set Calibration
Background
Proper test equipment calibration ensures that the test equipment and
associated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and that
measurements are correct.
If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has been
calibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not
need to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,
communications test set, additional test equipment,
associated test cables, and adapters.)
NOTE
This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.
Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables and
adapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) has
been calibrated and maintained as a set.
If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,
that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been
replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so
can introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrect
measurements and degradation to system performance.
CAUTION
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
IMPORTANT
*
Purpose of Test Set
Calibration
These procedures access the LMF automated calibration routine used to
determine the path losses of the supported communications analyzer,
power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antenna switch that
make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, the gain/loss
offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on the LMF.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-55
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Selecting Test Equipment
Use LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipment
automatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.
A Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided for
test equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when the
test equipment items are connected directly to the LMF computer via a
GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used when
the test equipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.
SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to
the GPIB box.
Manually Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab
Test equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the test
equipment is connected. The LMF does not check to see if the test
equipment is actually detected for manual specification. Follow the
procedure in Table 3-23 to select test equipment manually.
Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab
nStep Action
1From the Options menu, select LMF Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).
5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.
6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box.
Recommended Addresses
13=Power Meter
18=CDMA Analyzer
7Click on Apply. (The button darkens until the selection has been committed.)
NOTE
With manual selection, the LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected and
communicating with the LMF.
8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-56
Automatically Selecting Test
Equipment in a Serial
Connection Tab When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, the LMF
examines which test equipment items are actually communicating with
the LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-24 to use the auto-detect
feature.
Table 3-24: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect
nStep Action
1From the Options menu, select LMF Options.
The LMF Options window appears.
2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).
3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).
4Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).
5Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).
NOTE
When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses to
search box is used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a power
meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in
the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) is used for RF power measurements. If
the test equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter
is not selected.
6Click on Apply.
NOTE
The button darkens until the selection has been committed. A check mark appears in the Manual
Configuration section for detected test equipment items.
7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-57
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Calibrating Test Equipment
The calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement level
of the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.
If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the power
meter is zeroed.
Use the Calibrate Test Equipment menu item from the Util menu to
calibrate test equipment. The test equipment must be selected before
calibration can begin. Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the
test equipment.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for tests
that are to be run.
STest equipment has been selected.
Table 3-25: Test Equipment Calibration
nStep Action
1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment.
A Directions window is displayed.
2Follow the directions provided.
3Click on Continue to close the Directions window.
A status report window is displayed.
4Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibrating Cables
The cable calibration function measures the loss (in dB) for the TX and
RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer is used to
measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cable configuration and
RX cable configuration). The cable calibration consists of the following:
SMeasuring the loss of a short cable – This is required to compensate
for any measurement error of the analyzer. The short cable (used only
for the calibration process) is used in series with both the TX and RX
cable configuration when measuring. The measured loss of the short
cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RX cable
configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RX cable
configurations. The result is then adjusted out of both the TX and RX
measurements to compensate for the measured loss.
SThe short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured –
The RX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable
with type-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX
port of the test equipment.
. . . continued on next page
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-58
SThe short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured –
The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables with
type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additional
attenuator (if required by the specified BTS). The total loss of the path
loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS
(normally 30 or 50 dB).
Calibrating Cables with a
CDMA Analyzer
Cable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-10
illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup. Appendix F covers
the procedures for manual cable calibration.
LMF cable calibration for PCS systems (1.7/1.9 GHz)
cannot be accomplished using an HP8921 analyzer with
PCS interface or an Advantest analyzer. A different
analyzer type or the signal generator and spectrum analyzer
method must be used (refer to Table 3-27 and Figure 3-17).
Cable calibration values are then manually entered.
NOTE
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Table 3-26: Cable Calibration
nStep Action
1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration.
A Cable Calibration window is displayed.
2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box.
NOTE
Multiple channels numbers must be separated with a comma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two
or more channels numbers are entered, the cables are calibrated for each channel. Interpolation is
accomplished for other channels as required for TX calibration.
3 Select TX and RX Cable Cal, TX Cable Cal, or RX Cable Cal in the Cable Calibration pick
list.
4 Click OK. Follow the direction displayed for each step.
A status report window displays the results of the cable calibration.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-59
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Calibrating TX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the TX cables using a
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-17 for a
diagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.
Table 3-27: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
nStep Action
1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.
2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:
–869–894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA
–1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS.
–1840–1870 MHz for KoreaN PCS
3Use a spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-17, A) and record the
value.
4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of the
diagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:
–869–894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA
–1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS.
–1840–1870 MHz for Korean PCS
Record the value at point B.
5Calibration factor = A – B
Example: Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dB
NOTE
The short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration is
completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures
use the correct calibration factor.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-60
Figure 3-17: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX BLO and TX ATP Tests
(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
50 OHM
TERMINATION
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
Spectrum
Analyzer
Signal
Generator
A
Spectrum
Analyzer
40W NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
B
SHORT TEST CABLE
Signal
Generator
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THE HP8481A POWER
SENSOR DURING TX BAY LEVEL OFFSET TEST AND TO THE
PCS INTERFACE BOX INPUT PORT DURING TX ATP TESTS.
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO
THE TX PORTS DURING TX BAY LEVEL
OFFSET TEST AND TX ATP TESTS.
CABLE FROM 20 DB @ 20W ATTENUATOR TO THE
PCS INTERFACE OR THE HP8481A POWER SENSOR.
A
ONE 20DB 20 W IN
LINE ATTENUATOR
FW00293
Calibrating RX Cables Using a
Signal Generator and
Spectrum Analyzer Follow the procedure in Table 3-28 to calibrate the RX cables using the
signal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-18, if required.
Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
nStep Action
1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal
Generator.
2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:
–824–849 for 800 MHz CDMA
–1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS
–1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS
3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-18, A) and record the
value for A.
4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram to measure the output at the
customer’s RX frequency of:
–824–849 for 800 MHz CDMA
–1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS
–1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCS
Record the value at point B.
. . . continued on next page
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Table 3-28: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer
nActionStep
5Calibration factor = A – B
Example: Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBm
NOTE
The short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final
test setup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup,
as is, to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.
Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test
(using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)
Spectrum
Analyzer
Signal
Generator
A
B
Spectrum
Analyzer
SHORT
TEST
CABLE
SHORT TEST
CABLE
CONNECTION TO THE HP PCS
INTERFACE OUTPUT PORT
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS.
Signal
Generator
BULLET
CONNECTOR
LONG
CABLE 2
CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTS
DURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW00294
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-62
Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations are
normally set by accomplishing cable calibration using the applicable test
equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cable loss files. The
cable loss values can also be set/changed manually. Follow the procedure
in Table 3-29 to set cable loss values.
Prerequisites
SLogged into the BTS
Table 3-29: Setting Cable Loss Values
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit>Cable Loss>TX or RX.
A data entry pop–up window appears.
3To add a new channel number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the Channel # and Loss
(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.
4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.
6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.
7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.
NOTE
SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels, the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.
SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
3
Test Set Calibration – continued
DRAFT
Mar 2001 3-63
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value If an in–service TX coupler is installed, the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)
must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX
calibration and audit calculations. Follow the procedure in Table 3-30 to
set TX coupler loss values.
Prerequisites
SLogged into the BTS.
Table 3-30: Setting TX Coupler Loss Value
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit>TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window appears.
3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.
4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.
Values entered/changed after the Save button was used are not saved.
NOTE
SThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Options>LMF Options>BTS Options tab must
checked before entered TX coupler loss values are used by the TX calibration and audit functions.
SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-64
Introduction to Bay Level
Offset Calibration
Calibration compensates for normal equipment variations within the
BTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.
RF Path Bay Level Offset
Calibration
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database calibration
table in the LMF. The BLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX.
For starter frames, each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and
terminates at a backplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX
backplane slot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX
antenna port.
For expansion frames each receive path starts at the BTS RX port of the
cell site starter frame, travels through the frame-to-frame expansion
cable, and terminates at a backplane BBX slot of the expansion frame.
The transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot of the expansion frame,
travels though the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port of the
same expansion frame.
Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBX
slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in a BLO database. Each
transmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels
through the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path
calibration is performed, the RX path BLO is automatically set to the
default value.
At omni sites, BBX slots 1 and 13 (redundant) are tested. At sector sites,
BBX slots 1 through 12, and 13 (redundant) are tested. Only those slots
(sectors) actually equipped in the current CDF are tested, regardless of
physical BBX board installation in the slot.
When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required:
SAfter initial BTS installation
SOnce each year
SAfter replacing any of the following components or associated
interconnecting RF cabling:
–BBX board
–C–CCP shelf
–CIO card
–CIO to LPA backplane RF cable
–LPA backplane
–LPA
. . . continued on next page
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-65
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
–TX filter / TX filter combiner
–TX thru-port cable to the top of frame
TX Path Calibration
The TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and the
first order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper function
of each RF path is verified during calibration. The external test
equipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector you must first verify that there are no
CDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sector
assigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap
while handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,
there is a high probability that the card/module could be
damaged by ESD.
CAUTION
At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of
each CCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated
with BBX boards), move BBX boards from shelves
currently not under test and install them into the empty
BBX slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure that
all BBX TX paths are tested.
–This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites
that are due for periodic optimization.
–Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the
correct BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as
required to include BBX slots not currently equipped
(per Systems Engineering documentation).
IMPORTANT
*
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-66
BLO Calibration Data File
During the calibration process, the LMF creates a bts–n.cal calibration
(BLO) offset data file in the bts–n folder. After calibration has been
completed, this offset data must be downloaded to the BBXs using the
Download BLO function. An explanation of the file is shown below.
Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you
print out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the
following descriptions.
NOTE
The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (a
slot Block).
Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20
contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX. Each BBX slot
header block contains:
SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters of
createMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.
SThe number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries corresponding
to 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header and
actual calibration data.
SThe calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. The
array is organized by branch, sector, and calibration point.
–The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch the
contained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, main
receive and diversity receive offsets as follows:
Table 3-31: BLO BTS.cal File Array Assignments
Range Assignment
C[1]–C[240] Transmit
C[241]–C[480] Main Receive
C[481]–C[720] Diversity Receive
Slot 385 is the BLO for the RFDS.
NOTE
. . . continued on next page
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-67
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
–The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Configurations
supported are Omni, 3–sector or 6–sector.
Table 3-32: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)
BBX Sectorization TX RX RX Diversity
Slot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)
1 (Omni) 3–Sector, C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]
23–Sector,
1st C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]
36 Sector, Carrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]
41st
Carrier 3–Sector, C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]
5Carrier 3–Sector,
3rd C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]
6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]
73–Sector, C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]
83–Sector,
2nd C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]
96 Sector, Carrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]
10 2nd
Carrier 3–Sector, C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]
11 Carrier 3–Sector,
4th C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]
12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]
Slot[20]] (Redundant BBX–13)
1 (Omni) 3–Sector, C[1]–C[20] C[241]–C[260] C[481]–C[500]
23–Sector,
1st C[21]–C[40] C[261]–C[280] C[501]–C[520]
36 Sector, Carrier C[41]–C[60] C[281]–C[300] C[521]–C[540]
41st
Carrier 3–Sector, C[61]–C[80] C[301]–C[320] C[541]–C[560]
5Carrier 3–Sector,
3rd C[81]–C[100] C[321]–C[340] C[561]–C[580]
6Carrier C[101]–C[120] C[341]–C[360] C[581]–C[600]
73–Sector, C[121]–C[140] C[361]–C[380] C[601]–C[620]
83–Sector,
2nd C[141]–C[160] C[381]–C[400] C[621]–C[640]
96 Sector, Carrier C[161]–C[180] C[401]–C[420] C[641]–C[660]
10 2nd
Carrier 3–Sector, C[181]–C[200] C[421]–C[440] C[661]–C[680]
11 Carrier 3–Sector,
4th C[201]–C[220] C[441]–C[460] C[681]–C[700]
12 Carrier C[221]–C[240] C[461]–C[480] C[701]–C[720]
STen calibration points per sector are supported for each branch. Two
entries are required for each calibration point.
SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel
(frequency) where the BLO is measured. The second value (all even
entries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from
2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500
corresponds to +125 dBm).
. . . continued on next page
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-68
SThe 20 calibration entries for each sector/branch combination must be
stored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points
(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated is
repeated to fill out the 10 points.
Example:
C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”
C[2]=19102, even cal entry
C[3]=777,
C[4]=19086,
.
.
C[19]=777,
C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this
would be repeated for the next 8 points)
SWhen the BBX is loaded with image = data, the cal file data for the
BBX is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the cal
file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[240]. Sector 1’s ten calibration
points are sent (C[1] – C[20]) followed by sector 2’s ten calibration
points (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next (C[241] –
C[480]), followed by the RxDCal data (C[481] – C[720]).
STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for each
set.
Test Equipment Setup:
RF Path Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to set up test equipment.
Table 3-33: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)
Step Action
NOTE
Verify the GPIB controller is properly connected and turned on.
! CAUTION
To prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dB
directional coupler for 800 MHz with an additional 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1.7/1.9 GHz.
1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have not
already done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3–2 on page 3-6.
SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-25 on page 3-57.
SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 starting on page 3-48.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-69
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
TX Path Calibration
The assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the top
of the frame) for transmit calibration are derived from the site CDF files.
For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelList
CDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwr
CDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (located
under the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF file
parameter).
If both the BTS–x.cdf and CBSC–x.cdf files are current,
all information will be correct on the LMF. If not, the
carrier and channel will have to be set for each test.
NOTE
The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dB
of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than
+1.5 dB.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupler
option, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.
SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately
42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output power
measured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level
(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.
The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,
is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Output
minus BBX output level.
SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler
(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately
–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately
–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.
The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,
perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Audit
menu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TX
audit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made through
the appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
SCSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and data
load.
SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.
SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.
STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
. . . continued on next page
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-70
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 and
follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to perform the TX calibration test.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have been
returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards
moved since they were downloaded will have to be
downloaded again.
IMPORTANT
*
Follow the procedure in Table 3-34 to perform the TX calibration test.
Table 3-34: BTS TX Path Calibration
nStep Action
1Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.
2From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.
3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.)
4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
5Click on OK.
6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the status report window and provides information in the
Description field.
Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests fail
again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-71
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Download BLO Procedure
After a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset
(BLO) calibration file data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the
CAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded to
the selected BBX devices.
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
NOTE
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
SBBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).
STX calibration is successfully completed.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-35 to download the BLO data to the
BBXs.
Table 3-35: Download BLO
nStep Action
1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.
2From the Device menu, select Download BLO.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Selected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.
3Click on OK to close the status report window.
Calibration Audit Introduction
The BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generation
and storage of the BLO calibration offsets. The calibration audit
procedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at
the site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the
success or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is
used.
*RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data
download to BBXs must have been successfully completed
prior to performing the calibration audit.
IMPORTANT
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-72
TX Path Audit
Perform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,
per the procedure in Table 3-36
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this
procedure does not need to be performed, as BLO is
downloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.
NOTE
TX Audit Test
The Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for a
BBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX output
connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
SCSM–1, GLI2s, and BBXs have correct code load and data load.
SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.
SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.
STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-36 to perform the BTS TX Path Audit
test.
. . . continued on next page
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-73
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 3-36: BTS TX Path Audit
nStep Action
1Select the BBX(s) to be audited.
2From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.
3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.
4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
5Click on OK.
6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
Exception Handling
In the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAIL
message in the Status Report window and provides information in the
Description field. Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the
test. If the tests fail again, note specifics about the failure, and refer to
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.
All Cal/Audit Test
The Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibration
and Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the
appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.
If the TX calibration portion of the test passes, the BLO
data is automatically downloaded to the BBX(s) before the
audit portion of the test is run.
NOTE
. . . continued on next page
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-74
Prerequisites
Before running this test, ensure that the following have been done:
SCSM–1, GLI2s, BBXs have correct code and data loads.
SPrimary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.
SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.
STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TX
BLO calibration.
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-37 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.
Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX
OUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX
channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Table 3-37: All Cal/Audit Test
nStep Action
1Select the BBX(s) to be tested.
2From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.
3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.
Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.
4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
5Click on OK.
6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the test results.
7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.
3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-75
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Create CAL File
The Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs and
creates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist, a
new one is created. If a CAL file already exists, it is updated. After a
BTS has been fully optimized, a copy of the CAL file must exist so it
can be transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully
performed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL file
exists. Note the following:
SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)
BBXs.
The user is not encouraged to edit the CAL file as this
action can cause interface problems between the BTS and
the LMF. To manually edit the CAL file, you must first
logout of the BTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and
then use the Create Cal File function, the edited
information is lost.
WARNING
Prerequisites
Before running this test, the following should be done:
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
SBBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloaded.
Table 3-38: Create CAL File
nStep Action
1Select the applicable BBXs.
NOTE
The CAL file is only updated for the selected BBXs.
2Click on the Device menu.
3Click on the Create Cal File menu item.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
4 Click OK to close the status report window.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-76
RFDS Description
The RFDS is not available for the –48 V BTS at the time
of this publication.
NOTE
The optional RFDS performs RF tests of the site from the CBSC or from
an LMF. The RFDS consists of the following elements:
SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)
SFWT Interface Card (FWTIC)
SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)
For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA RFDS
Hardware Installation manual and CDMA RFDS User’s Guide.
The LMF provides the following functions for RFDS equipment:
STX and RX Calibration
SDekey Test Subscriber Unit (TSU)
SDownload Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC)
SForward Test
SKey TSU
SMeasure TSU Receive Signal Strength Indication (RSSI)
SPing TSU
SProgram TSU Number Assignment Module (NAM)
SReverse Test
SRGLI actions (for GLI based RFDS units)
SSet ASU
SStatus TSU
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-77
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
RFDS Parameter Settings
The bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must
match the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the
editable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-39 explains how to edit
the parameter settings.
SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.
0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped
1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS
2 = Cobra RFDS
STsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) TSU not equipped
1 = TSU is equipped in the system
SMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system
(9600 system RFDS only)
SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 1
0 = (default) Not equipped
1 = Equipped
STestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to
15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials when
originating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,
and is to be used in this field.)
Any text editor supporting the LMF may be used to open
any text files to verify, view, or modify data.
NOTE
. . . continued on next page
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-78
Table 3-39: RFDS Parameter Settings
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
Log out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.
1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file
(1 = GLI based RFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).
EXAMPLE:
RfdsEquip = 2
TsuEquip = 1
MC1Equip = 0
MC2Equip = 0
MC3Equip = 0
MC4Equip = 0
Asu1Equip = 1
Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)
TestOrigDN = ’123456789’’
NOTE
The above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC and
copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database is
modified for the RFDS.
2Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields, data will need to be downloaded
to the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).
3To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item
(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).
A status report window displays the status of the download.
Click OK to close the status report window.
! CAUTION
After downloading data to the GLI2, the RFDS LED slowly begins flashing red and green for
approximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED
remains green.
4Status the RFDS TSU.
A status report window displays the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.
* IMPORTANT
If the LMF yields an error message, check the following:
SEnsure the AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.
SVerify the RFDS has power.
SVerify the RFDS status LED is green.
SVerify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).
SStatus the MGLI and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and the
device is in the proper state (INS).
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-79
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
RFDS TSU NAM Programming
The RFDS TSU NAM must be programmed with the appropriate system
parameters and phone number during hardware installation. The TSU
phone and TSU MSI must be recorded for each BTS used for OMC–R
RFDS software configuration. The TSU NAM should be configured the
same way that any local mobile subscriber would use.
The user will only need to program the NAM for the initial
install of the RFDS.
NOTE
The NAM must be programmed into the SUA before it can receive and
process test calls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Explanation of Parameters
used when Programming the
TSU NAM
Table 3-40 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.
Table 3-40: Definition of Parameters
Access_Overload_Code
Slot_Index
System ID
Network ID
These parameters are obtained from the switch.
Primary_Channel_A
Primary_Channel_B
Secondary_Channel_A
Secondary_Channel B
These parameters are the channels used in operation of the system.
Lock_Code
Security_Code
Service_Level
Station_Class_Mark
Do not change.
IMSI_11_12
IMSI_MCC These fields can be obtained at the OMC using the following
command:
OMC000>disp bts–# imsi
If the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,
otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.
MIN_1 Phone Number This field is the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESN and
MIN should be entered into the switch as well.
NOTE: This field is different from the TestOrigDN field in the
bts.cdf file. The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber,
and the TestOrigDN is the number is subscriber calls.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-80
Valid NAM Ranges
Table 3-41 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields are
missing or out of range, the RFDS errors out.
Table 3-41: Valid NAM Field Ranges
Valid Range
NAM Field Name Minimum Maximum
Access_Overload_Code 0 15
Slot_Index 0 7
System ID 0 32767
Network ID 0 32767
Primary_Channel_A 25 1175
Primary_Channel_B 25 1175
Secondary_Channel_A 25 1175
Secondary_Channel_B 25 1175
Lock_Code 0 999
Security_Code 0 999999
Service_Level 0 7
Station_Class_Mark 0 255
IMSI_11_12 0 99
IMSI_MCC 0 999
MIN Phone Number N/A N/A
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-81
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Set Antenna Map Data
The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and is required if an
RFDS is installed. Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an
RFDS is not installed. The antenna map data must be entered manually.
Perform the procedure in Table 3-42 to set the Antenna Map Data.
Prerequisite
SLogged into the BTS
Table 3-42: Set Antenna Map Data
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit>Antenna Map>TX or RX.
A data entry pop–up window appears.
3Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.
4Click on the Save button to save displayed values.
NOTE
Entered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
5Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window.
NOTE
Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-82
Set RFDS Configuration Data
If an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manually
entered. Perform the procedure in Table 3-43 to set the RFDS
Configuration Data.
Prerequisite
SLogged into the BTS.
The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to
the antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 3-43: Set RFDS Configuration Data
Step Action
1Click on the Util menu.
2 Select Edit>RFDS Configuration>TX or RX.
A data entry pop–up window appears.
3To add a new antenna number, click on the Add Row button, then click in the other columns and enter
the desired data.
4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.
NOTE
Refer to the Util >Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration data
examples.
5To delete a row, click on the row and click on the Delete Row button.
6To save displayed values, click on the Save button.
NOTE
SEntered values are used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout and login.
7To exit the window, click on the Dismiss button .
NOTE
Values entered/changed after using the Save button are not saved.
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 3-83
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
RFDS Calibration
The RFDS TX and RX antenna paths must be calibrated to ensure peak
performance. The RFDS calibration option calibrates the RFDS TX and
RX paths.
For a TX antenna path calibration, the BTS XCVR is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measured
by the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antenna
directional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item being
used (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between the
power level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antenna
directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.
For an RX antenna path calibration, the RFDS is keyed at a
pre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by the
BTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by the
BTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by the
RFDS keyed power level and the power level measured at the BTS
XCVR is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.
The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CAL
file.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
SBBXs are INS_TEST.
SCable calibration has been performed
STX calibration has been performed and BLO has been downloaded for
the BTS.
STest equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibration.
STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Follow the procedure in Table 3-44 to calibrate the TX and RX antenna
paths.
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration Procedure
nStep Action
1Select the RFDS tab.
2Select the RFDS menu.
3Select the RFDS Calibration menu item.
4Select the appropriate direction (TX or RX) in the Direction pick list.
5Type the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channel box.
NOTE
Separate channel numbers with a comma or dash (no spaces) if using more than one channel
number (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 for numbers through and including).
3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-84
Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration Procedure
nActionStep
6Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list.
NOTE
Use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple carriers.
7Select the appropriate Rx branch (Main, Diversity or Both) in the RX Branch pick list.
8Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.
9 Click OK.
A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.
10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
A status report window displays the results of the actions.
11 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
12 Click on the BTS tab.
13 Click on the MGLI.
14 Download the CAL file which has been updated with the RFDS offset data to the selected GLI
device by clicking on Device>Download Data from the tab menu bar and pulldown.
NOTE
The MGLI automatically transfers the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS.
Program TSU NAM
Follow the procedure in Table 3-45 to program the TSU NAM. The
NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,
or be used for any type of RFDS test.
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
SMGLI is INS.
STSU is powered up and has a code load.
Table 3-45: Program the TSU NAM
Step Action
1Select the RFDS tab.
2Select the SUA (Cobra RFDS) or TSU (GLI based RFDS).
3Click on the TSU menu.
4Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.
5Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-40 and Table 3-41).
6Click on the OK button to display the status report.
7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing
Mar 2001 3-85
68P09253A61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Objective
This section tests the redundancy options that could be included in the
cell site. These tests verify, under a fault condition, that all modules
equipped with redundancy switch operations to their redundant partner
and resume operation. An example would be to pull the currently active
CSM and verify the standby CSM takes over distribution of the CDMA
reference signal.
Redundancy covers many BTS modules. Confirm the redundant options
included in the BTS, and proceed as required. If the BTS has only basic
power supply redundancy, the tests and procedures detailed in the
following tables should be bypassed.
STable 3-48. Miscellaneous Alarm Tests (BTS Frame)
STable 3-49. BBX Redundancy Tests (BTS Frame)
STable 3-50. CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO Redundancy Alarm Tests
STable 3-51. LPA Redundancy Test
STable 3-52. MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
During redundancy verification of the test, alarms reported by the master
GLI (displayed via the alarm monitor) will also be verified/noted.
Test Equipment
The following pieces of test equipment are required to perform this test:
SLMF
SCommunications Test Set
Redundancy/Alarm Test
Perform each of the following tests to verify BTS redundancy and to
confirm all alarms are received and reported by the BTS equipment. The
procedures should be performed on the following modules/boards:
SPower supply/converter modules in all frames
SDistribution shelf modules in the BTS frame
SC–CCP shelf modules in the BTS frame (except MCCs)
SLPA modules in the BTS frame
SAMR Customer defined input/output tests
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-86
68P09253A61
Test Equipment Setup
Follow the procedure in Table 3-46 to set up test equipment:
All alarm tests are performed using TX antenna 1
NOTE
Table 3-46: Test Equipment Setup for Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step Action
1Interface the LMF computer to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS frame (refer to Table 3-2,
page 3-5).
2Login to the BTS.
3Set up test equipment for TX Calibration at TXOUT1 (see Figure 3-11 or Figure 3-12).
* IMPORTANT
If site is not equipped for redundancy, remove all GLI2 and BBX boards installed in any redundant
slot positions at this time.
4Display the alarm monitor by selecting Util>Alarm Monitor.
5Unequip all customer defined AMR alarms reported via the AMR Alarm connector (A & B) by
clicking on MGLI, then selecting Device>Customer Alarm Inputs>Unequipped.
NOTE
During configuration of MGLI alarm reporting, spurious alarms may report. Allow the BTS to
stabilize for 10 seconds. If any alarms are actively being reported after the BTS has stabilized,
determine the cause before proceeding further.
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-87
68P09253A61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Power Supply Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-47 to verify redundancy of the power supply
modules. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the alarm
monitor) are also verified.
Table 3-47: Power Supply/Converter Redundancy (BTS Frame)
Step Action
1Select the MGLI (highlight) and from the pulldown menu select:
Device>Set Redundant Sector>None/0
Device>Set Pilot>Only>Carrier–#–1-1
Device>Set Pilot>Only>Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
2Select (highlight) BBX–1 and from the pulldown menu select Device>Key XCVR.
3Set XCVR gain to 40 and enter the correct XCVR channel number.
4Remove PS–1 from the power distribution shelf (see Figure 3-19).
–Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
–Verify no other modules went OOS.
5Re-install PS–1.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
6Repeat steps 4 and 5 for PS–2 and PS–3.
NOTE
For +27 V systems, skip to step 7 through step 10.
7 On –48 V systems, remove PS–4 (see Figure 3-20).
–Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
–Verify no other modules went OOS.
8Re-install PS–4.
Observe the alarm clears on the alarm monitor.
9Repeat steps 7 and 8 for PS–5 through PS–9.
10 Verify that all PWR/ALM LEDs are GREEN.
11 Select BBX-1 and Device>Dekey XCVR
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-88
68P09253A61
Figure 3-19: SC 4812T C–CCP Shelf
19 mm Filler Panel
PS–3
AMR–1
CSM–1
CSM–2
38 mm Filler Panel
AMR–2
GLI2–1GLI2–2
MCC24–6
BBX2–1
BBX2–2
BBX2–3
BBX2–4
BBX2–5
BBX2–6
BBX2–RSwitch
MPC/EMPC–1MPC/EMPC–2
CIO
BBX2–7
BBX2–8
BBX2–9
BBX2–10
BBX2–11
BBX2–12
MCC24–5
MCC24–4
MCC24–3
MCC24–2
MCC24–1
MCC24–12
MCC24–11
MCC24–10
MCC24–9
MCC24–8
MCC24–7
PS–2
PS–1
CCD–2 CCD–1
NOTE: MCCs may be
MCC8Es, MCC24s, or
MCC–1Xs. BBXs may
be BBX2s or BBX–1Xs.
HSO/LFR
FW00295
Figure 3-20: –48 V BTS Power Conversion Shelf
FW00501
PS–6
AMR
PS–5
PS–4
PS–9
PS–8
PS–7
1C
1A
2A
2C
3C
3A
4A
4C
L
P
A
1D
1B
2B
2D
3D
3B
4B
4D
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-89
68P09253A61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Miscellaneous
Alarm/Redundancy Tests
Follow the steps in Table 3-48 to verify alarms reported by the master
GLI are displayed via the alarm monitor if a BTS frame module failure
occurs.
Table 3-48: Miscellaneous Alarm Tests
Step Action
1 Select Util>Alarm Monitor to display the alarm monitor window.
2Perform the following to verify fan module alarms:
•Unseat a fan module (see Figure 3-21 or Figure 3-22).
•Observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
•Replace fan module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
•Repeat for all other fan modules in the BTS frame.
NOTE
Follow Step 3 for Starter Frames and Step 4 for Expansion Frames.
3Starter Frames Only:
Perform the following to verify MPC module alarms.
•Unseat MPC modules (see Figure 3-19) one at a time.
•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
•Replace the MPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports the alarm clears.
4Expansion Frames Only:
Perform the following to verify EMPC module alarms.
•Unseat EMPC modules (see Figure 3-19) one at a time
•Observe that an alarm message was reported via the MGLI as displayed on the alarm monitor.
•Replace the EMPC modules and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
5If equipped with AMR redundancy, perform the following to verify AMR module redundancy/alarms.
•Unseat AMR 2 (see Figure 3-19).
•Observe that an alarm message is reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm monitor).
•Repeat Steps 1 through 3 and/or 4.
•Replace the AMR module and verify the alarm monitor reports that the alarm clears.
•Unseat AMR 1 and observe an alarm message was reported via the MGLI (as displayed on the alarm
monitor).
•Replace the AMR module and verify the LMF reports the alarm has cleared.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at the completion of this test.
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-90
68P09253A61
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN MODULES
LATCHES
Figure 3-21: +27 V BTS C-CCP Fan Modules
FW00130
Figure 3-22: –48 V BTS C-CCP and Power Conversion Shelf Fan Modules
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN MODULES
LATCHES
FW00489
FAN MODULES
LATCHES
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
FAN
MODULE
PWR/ALM
REAR
FRONT
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-91
68P09253A61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
BBX Redundancy
Follow the steps in Table 3-49 to verify redundancy of the BBXs in the
C–CCP shelf. Alarms reported by the master GLI (displayed via the
alarm monitor) are also verified. This test can be repeated for additional
sectors at the customer’s discretion.
Table 3-49: BBX Redundancy Alarms
Step Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>Key Xcvr.
2Observe that primary BBXs key up, and a carrier is present at each respective frequency.
3Remove the primary BBX.
4Observe a carrier is still present.
The Redundant BBX is now the active BBX for Antenna 1.
5Replace the primary BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
6Re-enable the primary BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each respective
frequency.
7Remove the redundant BBX and observe a carrier is still present.
8 The Primary BBX is now the active BBX for ANT 1.
9Replace the redundant BBX and reload the BBX with code and data.
10 Re-enable the redundant BBX assigned to ANT 1 and observe that a carrier is present at each
respective frequency:
11 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>Dekey Xcvr.
12 Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for additional BBXs/antennas, if equipped.
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-92
68P09253A61
CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO
Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Follow the procedure in Table 3-50 to verify the manual redundancy of
the CSM, GPS, and LFR/HSO boards. Verification of alarms reported is
also covered.
DO NOT perform the procedure in Table 3-50, unless the
site is configured with a LORAN–C or HSO timebase as a
backup for the GPS.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 3-50: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step Action
n WARNING
Any BBXs enabled will immediately key-up. Before enabling any BBX, always verify that the TX
output assigned to the BBX is terminated into a 50 W non-radiating RF load! Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury and/or damage to the equipment.
1Enable the primary, then the redundant BBXs assigned to ANT 1 by selecting the BBX and
Device>Key Xcvr.
2Disconnect the GPS antenna cable, located on top of the BTS frame (see Figure 3-23).
This forces the LORAN–C LFR or HSO board timebase to become the CDMA timing source.
3Observe a CDMA timing reference alarm and source change is reported by the alarm monitor.
4Allow the LFR/HSO to become the active timing source.
SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to LFR/HSO reference.
SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panel are steady GREEN.
5Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.
6Allow the GPS to become the active timing source.
SVerify the BBXs remain keyed and INS.
SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer back to the GPS reference.
SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 1 are steady GREEN.
7 Disable CSM 1 and enable CSM 2.
SVarious CSM source and clock alarms are now reported and the site comes down.
SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.
. . . continued on next page
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-93
68P09253A61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 3-50: CSM, GPS, & LFR/HSO, Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Step Action
8Allow the CSM 2 board to go INS_ACT.
SVerify the BBXs are dekeyed and OOS, and the MCCs are OOS_RAM.
SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 2 reference.
SObserve the PWR/ALM LEDs on CSM 2 front panels are steady GREEN.
NOTE
It can take up to 20 minutes for the CSM to re-establish the GPS link and go INS. MCCs go
OOS_RAM.
9Key BBXs 1 and R and observe a carrier is present.
10 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 to verify CSM source redundancy with CSM 2.
* IMPORTANT
DO NOT ENABLE the redundant CSM.
11 Disable CSM 2 and enable CSM 1.
SVarious CSM Source and Clock alarms are reported and the site comes down.
SAlarms clear when the site comes back up.
12 De-key the Xcvr by selecting Device>Dekey Xcvr.
13 Allow the CSM 1 board to go INS_ACT.
SVerify the BBXs are de-keyed and OOS.
SVerify no other modules went OOS due to the transfer to CSM 1 reference.
SObserve PWR/ALM LEDs on the CSM 1 front panels are steady GREEN.
14 Disable the primary and redundant BBXs.
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-94
68P09253A61
Figure 3-23: +27 V SC 4812T Starter Frame I/O Plate
OUT
LAN
IN
LAN
GPS
AB
AB
SPAN I/O A SITE I/O SPAN I/O B
LFR/
ALARM B 4
3A
2A
1A
6A
5A
4A
3B
2B
1B
6B
5B
4B
GND
5
6
1
2
3
TX OUT
SPAN I/O ASPAN I/O B
CAUTION
LIVE TERMINALSLIVE TERMINALS +27 VDC
HSO
RX
ALARM A
EXP I/O
RGD
FRONT
REAR
FW00215
GPS IN
RGPS
REF
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-95
68P09253A61
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
LPA Redundancy Test
Follow the procedure in Table 3-51 to verify redundancy of the LPAs.
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed BEFORE
moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so can result
in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
WARNING
Table 3-51: LPA Redundancy Test
Step Action
1From the pulldown menu select:
Device > Set Redundant Sector > None/0
Device > Set Pilot > Only > Carrier–#–1-1
Device > Set Pilot > Only > Carrier–#-1-1 and Pilot Gain = 262
2Key-up the BBX assigned to the LPAs associated with the sector under test (gain = 40).
3Adjust the communications test set spectrum analyzer, as required, to observe the overall carrier
amplitude and IM Shelf and note for reference. These figures will be required later.
NOTE
See Figure 3-13 for test equipment setup, if required.
4Push-in and release the breaker supplying the 1st LPA of the pair.
NOTE
After power is removed, IM suppression takes a few seconds to settle out while compensating for the
removal of the 1st LPA. The overall gain decreases by approximately 6 dB. The process must be
complete before proceeding.
5 Verify:
•The other LPA module did not go OOS due to the loss of the LPA.
•The overall carrier amplitude is reduced by approximately 6 dB and IM suppression on the analyzer
display remains basically unchanged.
•LPA fault message is reported via the MGLI and displayed on the alarm monitor.
6Re-apply power to the LPA module and observe the alarm has cleared on the alarm monitor.
NOTE
All PWR/ALM LEDs should be GREEN at completion of test.
7Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to verify the 2nd LPA of the pair.
8De-key the BBX.
n WARNING
First verify there are no BBX channels keyed when moving the antenna connection. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.
9Repeat Steps 1 through 8 to verify LPAs assigned to sectors 2 and 3 (if equipped). Move the test cable
on top of the BTS to TX OUT 2 and TX OUT 3 antenna connectors as required.
3
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-96
68P09253A61
MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test
This test can only be performed when the MM path is
established by the MM (not just with LAPD link
connected). Attempting to force the GLIs to “hot swap”
under alarm monitor control, when isolated from the MM,
causes MGLIs to hang up.
CAUTION
Table 3-52: MGLI/GLI Redundancy Test (with MM Connection Established)
Step Action
NOTE
SThis test assumes the alarm monitor is NOT connected to the BTS and the T1/E1 span is connected
and communication is established with the MM.
SBOTH GLIs must be INS before continuing.
1Verify the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
2Identify the primary and redundant MGLI pairs.
3Pull the MGLI that is currently INS–ACT and has cage control.
4Observe the BBX remains GREEN, and the redundant MGLI is now active.
5Verify no other modules go OOS due to the transfer of control to the redundant module.
6Verify that the BBXs are enabled and a CDMA carrier is present.
7Reinstall the MGLI and have the OMCR/CBSC place it back in-service.
8Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to verify the other MGLI/GLI board.
3
BTS Alarms Testing
Mar 2001 3-97
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Alarm Test Overview
ALARM connectors provide Customer Defined Alarm Inputs and
Outputs. The customer can connect BTS site alarm input sensors and
output devices to the BTS, thus providing alarm reporting of active
sensors as well controlling output devices.
The SC 4812T is capable of concurrently monitoring 36 input signals
coming into the BTS. These inputs are divided between 2 Alarm
connectors marked ‘ALARM A’ and ‘ALARM B’ located at the top of
the frame (see Figure 3-24). The ALARM A connector is always
functional; ALARM B is functional when an AMR module is equipped
in the AMR 2 slot in the distribution shelf. ALARM A port monitors
input numbers 1 through 18, while ALARM B port monitors input
numbers 19 through 36 (see Figure 3-25). State transitions on these input
lines are reported to the LMF and OMCR as MGLI Input Relay alarms.
ALARM A and ALARM B connectors each provide 18 inputs and 8
outputs. If both A and B are functional, 36 inputs and 16 outputs are
available. They may be configured as redundant. The configuration is set
by the CBSC.
Alarm Reporting Display
The Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occur
after the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,
select Util>Alarm Monitor.
The following buttons are included:
SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, and
Major) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level of
alarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desired
alarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the <Ctrl> key (for
individual selections) or <Shift> key (for a range of selections) while
clicking on the desired levels.
SThe Pause button pauses/stops the display of alarms. When the Pause
button is clicked the name of the button changes to Continue. When
the Continue button is clicked, the display of alarms continues.
Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button is clicked and
the Continue button is clicked are not displayed.
SThe Clear button clears the Alarm Monitor display. New alarms that
occur after the Clear button is clicked are displayed.
SThe Dismiss button dismisses/closes the Alarm Monitor display.
3
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-98
59
1
60
2
59
1
60
2
Figure 3-24: Alarm Connector Location and Connector Pin Numbering
FW00301
Purpose The following procedures verify the customer defined alarms and relay
contacts are functioning properly. These tests are performed on all AMR
alarms/relays in a sequential manner until all have been verified. Perform
these procedures periodically to ensure the external alarms are reported
properly. Following these procedures ensures continued peak system
performance.
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the AMR cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frame with external alarm sensors and/or relays
meet requirements called out in the SC 4812T Series BTS Installation
Manual.
Motorola highly recommends that you read and understand
this procedure in its entirety before starting this procedure.
IMPORTANT
*
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required to perform these tests:
SLMF
SAlarms Test Box (CGDSCMIS00014) –optional
. . . continued on next page
3
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-99
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Abbreviations used in the following figures and tables are
defined as:
SNC = normally closed
SNO = normally open
SCOM or C = common
SCDO = Customer Defined (Relay) Output
SCDI = Customer Defined (Alarm) Input
NOTE
59 1
60 2
ALARM A
(AMR 1) ALARM B
(AMR 2)
Returns
25
26
A CDI 18 . . . A CDI 1
59 1
60 2
Returns
25
26
B CDI 36 . . . B CDI 19
FW00302
Figure 3-25: AMR Connector Pin Numbering
The preferred method to verify alarms is to follow the
Alarms Test Box Procedure, Table 3-53. If not using an
Alarm Test Box, follow the procedure listed in Table 3-54.
NOTE
CDI Alarm Input Verification
with Alarms Test Box
Table 3-53 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification using
the Alarm Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed and compare results
with the LMF display.
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The
default delay is 5 seconds. Leave the alarms test box
switches in the new position until the alarms have been
reported.
NOTE
Table 3-53: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step Action
1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
2Select the MGLI.
. . . continued on next page
3
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-100
Table 3-53: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step Action
3Click on the Device menu.
4Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
5Click on N.O. Inputs.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
6Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
7Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
8Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector (see Figure 3-24).
9Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for
each switch setting.
10 Set all of the switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported
for each switch setting.
11 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
12 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
13 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position. An alarm should be reported for each
switch setting
14 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position. A clear alarm should be reported for each
switch setting.
15 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
16 Select the MGLI.
17 Click on the Device menu.
18 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
19 Click on N.C. Inputs. A status report window displays the results of the action.
20 Click OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
21 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
22 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 18.
23 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
24 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
25 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
. . . continued on next page
3
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-101
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 3-53: CDI Alarm Input Verification Using the Alarms Test Box
Step Action
26 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
A clear alarm should be reported for alarm inputs 19 through 36.
27 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Open position.
An alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
28 Set all switches on the alarms test box to the Closed position.
A clear alarm should be reported for each switch setting.
29 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
30 Select the MGLI.
31 Click on the Device menu.
32 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
33 Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
34 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.
35 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM A connector.
36 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
37 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM A connector.
38 Connect the alarms test box to the ALARM B connector.
39 Set all switches on the alarms test box to both the Open and the Closed position.
No alarm should be reported for any switch settings.
40 Disconnect the alarms test box from the ALARM B connector.
41 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
3
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-102
CDI Alarm Input Verification
without Alarms Test Box
Table 3-54 describes how to test the CDI alarm input verification
without the use of the Alarms Test Box. Follow the steps as instructed
and compare results with the LMF display.
It may take a few seconds for alarms to be reported. The
default delay is 5 seconds. When shorting alarm pins wait
for the alarm report before removing the short.
NOTE
Table 3-54: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step Action
1Connect the LMF to the BTS and log into the BTS.
2Select the MGLI.
3Click on the Device menu
4Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
5Click on N.O. Inputs.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
6Click on OK to close the status report window.
7Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
8Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
9Select the MGLI.
10 Click on the Device menu.
11 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
12 Click on N.C. Inputs.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
13 Click on OK to close the status report window.
Alarms should be reported for alarm inputs 1 through 36.
. . . continued on next page
3
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
Mar 2001 3-103
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 3-54: CDI Alarm Input Verification Without the Alarms Test Box
Step Action
14 Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
15 Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
A clear alarm should be reported for each pair of pins that are shorted.
An alarm should be reported for each pair of pins when the short is removed.
16 Select the MGLI.
17 Click on the Device menu
18 Click on the Customer Alarm Inputs menu item.
19 Click on Unequipped.
A status report window displays the results of the action.
20 Click on OK to close the status report window.
21 Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM A connector CDI 1 through CDI 18 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
22 Refer to Figure 3-25 and sequentially short the ALARM B connector CDI 19 through CDI 36 pins
(25–26 through 59–60) together.
No alarms should be displayed.
23 Load data to the MGLI to reset the alarm relay conditions according to the CDF file.
Pin and Signal Information for
Alarm Connectors
Table 3-55 lists the pins and signal names for Alarms A and B.
Table 3-55: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
ALARM A ALARM B
Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name
1A CDO1 NC 31 Cust Retn 4 1B CDO9 NC 31 B CDI 22
2A CDO1 Com 32 A CDI 4 2B CDO9 Com 32 Cust Retn 22
3A CDO1 NO 33 Cust Retn 5 3B CDO9 NO 33 B CDI 23
4A CDO2 NC 34 A CDI 5 4B CDO10 NC 34 Cust Retn 23
5A CDO2 Com 35 Cust Retn 6 5B CDO10 Com 35 B CDI 24
6A CDO2 NO 36 A CDI 6 6B CDO10 NO 36 Cust Retn 24
. . . continued on next page
3
BTS Alarms Testing – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
3-104
Table 3-55: Pin and Signal Information for Alarm Connectors
ALARM A ALARM B
Pin Signal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal NamePinSignal Name
7A CDO3 NC 37 Cust Retn 7 7B CDO11 NC 37 B CDI 25
8A CDO3 Com 38 A CDI 7 8B CDO11 Com 38 Cust Retn 25
9A CDO3 NO 39 Cust Retn 8 9B CDO11 NO 39 B CDI 26
10 A CDO4 NC 40 A CDI 8 10 B CDO12 NC 40 Cust Retn 26
11 A CDO4 Com 41 Cust Retn 9 11 B CDO12 Com 41 B CDI 27
12 A CDO4 NO 42 A CDI 9 12 B CDO12 NO 42 Cust Retn 27
13 A CDO5 NC 43 Cust Retn 10 13 B CDO13 NC 43 B CDI 28
14 A CDO5 Com 44 A CDI 10 14 B CDO13 Com 44 Cust Retn 28
15 A CDO5 NO 45 Cust Retn 11 15 B CDO13 NO 45 B CDI 29
16 A CDO6 NC 46 A CDI 11 16 B CDO14 NC 46 Cust Retn 29
17 A CDO6 Com 47 Cust Retn 12 17 B CDO14 Com 47 B CDI 30
18 A CDO6 NO 48 A CDI 12 18 B CDO14 NO 48 Cust Retn 30
19 A CDO7 NC 49 Cust Retn 13 19 B CDO15 NC 49 B CDI 31
20 A CDO7 Com 50 A CDI 13 20 B CDO15 Com 50 Cust Retn 31
21 A CDO7 NO 51 Cust Retn 14 21 B CDO15 NO 51 B CDI 32
22 A CDO8 NC 52 A CDI 14 22 B CDO16 NC 52 Cust Retn 32
23 A CDO8 Com 53 Cust Retn 15 23 B CDO16 Com 53 B CDI 33
24 A CDO8 NO 54 A CDI 15 24 B CDO16 NO 54 Cust Retn 33
25 Cust Retn 1 55 Cust Retn 16 25 B CDI 19 55 B CDI 34
26 A CDI 1 56 A CDI 16 26 Cust Retn 19 56 Cust Retn 34
27 Cust Retn 2 57 Cust Retn 17 27 B CDI 20 57 B CDI 35
28 A CDI 2 58 A CDI 17 28 Cust Retn 20 58 Cust Retn 35
29 Cust Retn 3 59 Cust Retn 18 29 B CDI 21 (+27 V)
Converter Alarm (–48 V)
59 B CDI 36
30 A CDI 3 60 A CDI 18 30 Cust Retn 21 (+27 V)
Converter Retn (–48V)
60 Cust Retn 36
NOTE
CDO = Customer Defined Output
CDI = Customer Defined Input
3
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)
Table of Contents
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – All–inclusive TX & RX 4-1. . . . . . . . .
Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Prerequisites 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX OUT Connection 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Test Procedure 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Individual Acceptance Tests 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tx Mask Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rho Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pilot Offset Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Domain Power Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FER Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate an ATP Report 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATP Report 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedures – All–inclusive TX & RX
Mar 2001 4-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Introduction
The Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular Field
Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTS
subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility (LMF) and
supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File (CDF)
assignment.
The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to a
file that can be printed. All tests are controlled from the LMF platform
using the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipment
supported by the LMF can be used.
This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which is
the recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages of
simplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeying
commmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the execution
of complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feel
the command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into the
progress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, refer
to LMF CLI Commands, R15.X (68P09251A59).
Before performing any tests, use an editor to view the
“CAVEATS” section of the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf
folder for any applicable information.
The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service (OOS)
sectors only.
DO NOT substitute test equipment not supported by the
LMF.
IMPORTANT
*
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test set
connections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test
set components, if required.
NOTE
Customer requirements determine which ATP tests to are to be
performed, and the craftsperson selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.
The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:
SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.
These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs and
passive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filters,
and RF cables.
SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.
These include the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansion
frames), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI cards and the passive components
including RX filters (starter frame only), and RF cables.
. . . continued on next page
4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
4-2
SAll TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.
SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads the BLO,
and executes the TX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.
ATP Test Prerequisites
Before attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following have been
completed:
SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).
SLMF is logged into the BTS.
SCSMs, GLIs, BBXs, MCCs, and TSU (if the RFDS is installed) have
correct code load and data load.
SPrimary CSM, GLI, and MCCs are INS_ACT.
SBBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.
SBBXs are OOS_RAM.
STest cables are calibrated.
STest equipment is connected for ATP tests (see Figure 3-13 through
Figure 3-16 starting on page 3-50).
STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.
SGPIB is on.
Before performing the FER, be sure that all LPAs are
turned OFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter
ports are properly terminated.
All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP
tests.
Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily
injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
TX OUT Connection
Many of the acceptance test procedures require taking
measurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At
sites without RFDS installed, all measurements will be via
the BTS TX OUT connector. At sites with RFDS installed,
all measurements will be via the RFDS directional coupler
TX OUT connector.
IMPORTANT
*
4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX – continued
Mar 2001 4-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
ATP Test Procedure
There are three different ATP testing options that can be performed to
completely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of the
following ATP testing options should be run.
SATP Testing Option 1
–All TX/RX
SATP Testing Option 2
–All TX
–All RX
SATP Testing Option 3
–TX Mask Test
–Rho Test
–Pilot Time Offset Test
–Code Domain Power Test
–FER Test
The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX
path calibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.
NOTE
If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,
remove the manual control/system memory card from the
card slot and set the I/O Config to the Talk & Lstn mode
before starting the automated testing.
IMPORTANT
*
Follow the procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.
The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.
NOTE
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
nStep Action
1Select the device(s) to be tested.
2From the Tests menu, select the test you want to run.
3Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier
pick list.
NOTE
To select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.
. . . continued on next page
4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – All–inclusive TX & RX – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
4-4
Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure
nActionStep
4Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.
The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the
cbsc–n.cdf file for the BTS.
5Click on the OK button.
The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.
6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.
The test results are displayed in the status report window.
7Click on Save Results or Dismiss.
NOTE
If Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file.
4
TX Output Acceptance Tests: Introduction
Mar 2001 4-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Individual Acceptance Tests
The following individual tests can be used to verify the results of
specific tests.
Spectral Purity TX Mask (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generated
on each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification with
respect to the assigned CDF file values.
Waveform Quality (rho)
This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digital
waveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in
ANSI–J_STD–019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual and
perfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents
100% (or perfect correlation).
Pilot Time Offset
The Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzer
measurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and the
incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Pilot
Gain = 262, PN Offset = 0).
Code Domain Power (Primary & Redundant BBX)
This test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set for
all ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to
10.2 $ 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”
Walsh channels measures v –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA
channel power).
Frame Error Rate
The Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entire
CDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to all
respective sector/antennas. This test verifies the BTS sensitivity on all
traffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs at
an RF input level of –119 dBm (or –116 dBm if using TMPC).
4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
4-6
Tx Mask Test
This test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at a
specific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests are
performed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the same
command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only). BBX power output is set to obtain +40 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler).
TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power
level to +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from
pilot gain set to 541.
NOTE
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the
attenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolution
bandwidth. With respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel
measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth in dB, verify that results meet
system tolerances at the following test points:
S1.7/1.9 GHz:
–at least –45 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency
–at least –45 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency
S800 MHz:
–at least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency
–at least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency
–at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
–at least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency
The BBX then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued
Mar 2001 4-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display
– 900 kHz + 900 kHz
Center Frequency
Reference
Attenuation level of all
spurious and IM products
with respect to the mean
power of the CDMA channel
.5 MHz Span/Div
Ampl 10 dB/Div
Mean CDMA Bandwidth
Power Reference
+750 kHz
+ 1980 kHz
– 750 kHz
– 1980 kHz
FW00282
4
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
4-8
Rho Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveform
quality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the
current CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elements
from the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using
both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
channel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying that the
result meets system tolerances:
SWaveform quality (rho) should be > 0.912 (–0.4 dB).
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then be repeated.
4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test
Mar 2001 4-9
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Pilot Offset Acceptance Test
This test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offset
of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current
CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the external
calibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurements
are via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all TCH elements from
the MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up, using both
bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot
channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to
40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or
RFDS directional coupler).
The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilot
Time Offset in µs, verifying results meet system tolerances:
SPilot Time Offset should be within < 3 µs of the target PT
Offset (0 µs).
The BBX then de-keys, and if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated.
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
4-10
Code Domain Power Test
This test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX carrier
keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.
All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled by
the same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT
(BTS/RFDS) connector.
For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262. All MCC
channel elements under test are configured to generate Orthogonal
Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes and to be
assigned a full–rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs to
be tested an any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32
CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made; so all channel
elements are verified on all sectors.
BBX power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT
connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).
You verify the code domain power levels, which have been set for all
ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is
done by verifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is
equal to 10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channels
measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).
The BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to
assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TX antenna path
under test. The test is then repeated. Upon completion of the test, OCNS
is disabled on the specified MCC/CE.
4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued
Mar 2001 4-11
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels
Pilot Channel
Active channels
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB SPEC.
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64
MAX OCNS
CHANNEL
MIN OCNS
CHANNEL
8.2 dB 12.2 dB
MAX NOISE
FLOOR
Pilot Channel
Active channels
PILOT LEVEL
MAX OCNS SPEC.
MIN OCNS SPEC.
MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:
< –27 dB
Inactive channels
Walsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64
FAILURE – DOES NOT
MEET MIN OCNS SPEC.
FAILURE – EXCEEDS
MAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dB
FAILURE – EXCEEDS MAX
NOISE FLOOR SPEC.
Showing all OCNS Passing
Indicating Failures FW00283
4
RX Frame Error Rate (FER) Acceptance Test
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
4-12
FER Test
This test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currently
configured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF input
level of –119 dBm [or –116 dBm if using Tower Top
Amplifier (TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated
test set as the signal source controlled by the same command. All
measurements are via the LMF.
The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna, and all channel
elements from the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX is keyed
up, using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with
pilot channel element only). BBX power output is set to –20 dBm as
measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS
directional coupler). The BBX must be keyed to enable the RX receive
circuitry.
The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcode
and provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverse
link for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying that
results meet the following specification:
SFER returned less than 1% and total frames measured is 1500
All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. The
BBX then de-keys and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured to assign
the applicable redundant BBX to the current RX antenna paths under
test. The test is then repeated.
4
Generate an ATP Report
Mar 2001 4-13
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Background
Each time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include the
results of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used to
close the status report window. The ATP report is not updated if the
status reports window is closed using the Dismiss button.
ATP Report
Each time an ATP test is run, a separate report is created for each BTS
and includes the following for each test:
STest name
SBBX number
SChannel number
SCarrier number
SSector number
SUpper test limit
SLower test limit
STest result
SPASS or FAIL
SDescription information (if applicable)
STime stamp
SDetails/Warning information (if applicable)
The report can be printed if the LMF computer is connected to a printer.
Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and/or print the ATP
report for a BTS.
Table 4-2: Generating an ATP Report
nStep Action
1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).
2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.
3Click on the Report button.
4Click on a column heading to sort the report.
5–If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.
–If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the picklist and click on the
Save button.
4
Generate an ATP Report – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
4-14
Notes
4
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Chapter 5: Prepare to Leave the Site
Table of Contents
Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Test Equipment Removal 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset All Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Site Span Configuration Verification 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set BTS Site Span Configuration 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating CBSC LMF Files 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LMF Removal 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem 5-8. . . . . . . . . .
Re–establish OMC–R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
5
Prepare to Leave the Site
Mar 2001 5-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
External Test Equipment
Removal
Perform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment and
configure the BTS for active service.
Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal
Step Action
1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.
2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.
Verify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the
correct ports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will
cause system degradation of call processing.
CAUTION
Each module or device can be in any state prior to
downloading. Each module or device will be in an
OOS_RAM state after downloading has completed.
–For all LMF commands, information in italics
represents valid ranges for that command field.
–Only those fields requiring an input will be specified.
Default values for other fields will be assumed.
–For more complete command examples (including
system response details), refer to the CDMA LMF
User Guide.
NOTE
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
5-2
Reset All Devices
Reset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The
configuration data and code loads could be different from data and code
on the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper data
and code when the span is active again.
Follow the procedure in Table 5-2 as required to bring all processor
modules from the OOS to INS mode.
Have the CBSC/MM bring up the site and enable all
devices at the BTS.
IMPORTANT
*
Table 5-2: Enabling Devices
nStep Action
1On the LMF, select the device(s) you wish to enable.
NOTE
The MGLI and CSM must be INS before an MCC can be put INS.
2Click on Device from the menu bar.
3Click on Enable from the Device menu.
A status report window is displayed.
NOTE
If a BBX2 is selected, a Transceiver Parameters window is displayed to collect keying
information.
Do not enable the BBX2.
4 Click OK to close the Transceiver Parameters window.
A status report window displays the status of the device.
5 Click OK to close the status report window.
The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green.
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Mar 2001 5-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans
and Integrated Frame Modem
Before leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors that
were removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-3
and Figure 5-1 as required.
Table 5-3: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections
Step Action
1Connect the 50–pin TELCO cables to the BTS span I/O board 50–pin TELCO connectors.
2If used, connect the dial–up modem RS–232 serial cable to the Site I/O board RS–232 9–pin
sub D connector.
* IMPORTANT
Verify that you connect both SPAN cables (if removed previously), and the Integrated Frame
Modem (IFM) “TELCO” connector.
Figure 5-1: Site and Span I/O Boards T1 Span Connections
50–PIN TELCO
CONNECTORS
REMOVED
SPAN A CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
SPAN B CONNECTOR
(TELCO) INTERFACE
TO SPAN LINES
TOP of Frame
(Site I/O and Span I/O boards)
RS–232 9–PIN SUB D
CONNECTOR SERIAL
PORT FOR EXTERNAL
DIAL UP MODEM
CONNECTION (IF USED)
FW00299
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
5-4
BTS Site Span Configuration
Verification
Perform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2
boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should be
verified.
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step Action
1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of the
MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).
2Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
3Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line
code configuration (in bold type):
span view <cr>
Observe a display similar to the options shown below:
COMMAND ACCEPTED: span view
The parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.
The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.
Equalization:
Span A – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)
Span B – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)
Span C – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)
SDD f lt (0 131 f t f T1/J1 120 Oh f E1)
Span D – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)
Span E – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)
Span F – Default (0–131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)
Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)
Currently, the link is running at the default rate
The actual rate is 0
NOTE
Defaults for span equalization are 0–131 feet for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.
Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.
There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC–R/CBSC span configuration requires it.
If the current MGLI2/SGLI2 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correct
choice, proceed to Table 5-5.
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Mar 2001 5-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step Action
4Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.
5Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connection
window menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.
FW00344
9–PIN TO 9– PIN
RS–232 CABLE
NULL MODEM BOARD
(PART# 8484877P01)
RS–232 CABLE
FROM LMF COM1
PORT
MMI SERIAL PORT
GLI BOARD
Figure 5-2: MGLI2/SGLI2 MMI Port Connection
Set BTS Site Span
Configuration
Perform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span Framing
Format and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI2/SGLI2
boards in all C–CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must be
configured.
Perform the following procedure ONLY if span
configurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not match
those in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the
exact configuration data is available. Loading incorrect
span configuration data will render the site inoperable.
IMPORTANT
*
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
5-6
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step Action
1If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the
front panel of the MGLI2 MMI port (see Figure 5-2).
2Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (see
Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
NOTE
The LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is being
used for the MMI session.
3If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parameters
to match that of the physical spans a – f run to the site:
span_config <option#1> <option#2> <option#3> <option#4> <option#5>
option#1 = the span to change (a – f)
option#2 = the span type (0 – 8):
0 – E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC–4)
1 – E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)
2 – E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC–4, TS16)
3 – E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)
4 – T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
5 – T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)
6 – J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
7 – J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)
8 – T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)
option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbps
option#4 = the span equalization (0 – 7):
0 – T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)
1 – T1_4 (T1,J1:393–524 feet)
2 – T1_4 (T1,J1:131–262 feet)
3 – E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)
4 – T1_4 (T1,J1:0–131 feet)
5 – T1_4 (T1,J1:524–655 feet)
6 – T1_4 (T1,J1:262–393 feet)
7 – E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)
option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 – 31)
Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120–Ohm, LAPD channel 1:
span_config a 1 64 7 1
.
.
span_config f 1 64 7 1
Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0–131 feet), LAPD channel 0:
span_config a 5 64 4 0
.
.
span_config f 5 64 4 0
. . . continued on next page
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Mar 2001 5-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
Make sure that spans a – f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may be
different for each individual span.
After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI2/SGLI2 board MUST be reset and
re–loaded for changes to take effect.
Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used at
the site.
4Press the RESET button on the GLI2 for changes to take effect.
5This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI2
and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI2/SGLI2 boards.
6Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI.
Updating CBSC LMF Files
Updated calibration (CAL) file information must be moved from the
LMF Windows environment back to the CBSC, which resides in a Unix
environment. The procedures that follow detail how to move files from
one environment to the other.
Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
The BLO calibration files should be backed up to a diskette (per BTS).
Follow the procedure in Table 5-6 to copy CAL files from a CDMA
LMF computer to a diskette.
Table 5-6: Backup CAL Data to a Diskette
nStep Action
1Insert a diskette into the LMF A drive.
NOTE
If your diskette has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The diskette must be DOS
formatted before copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or on–line help
on how to format diskettes.
2Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from the Programs menu.
3Click on your C: drive.
4Double Click on the wlmf folder.
5Double Click on the CDMA folder.
6Click on the bts–# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.
7Drag the BTS–#.cal file to the 3–1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release the
mouse button.
8Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired.
9Close the Windows Explorer program by selecting Close from the File menu option.
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
5-8
LMF Removal
DO NOT power down the LMF without performing the
procedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may
result, and in some cases, the LMF may lock up.
CAUTION
Follow the procedure in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session and
remove the terminal.
Table 5-7: LMF Termination and Removal
nStep Action
1From the CDMA window select File>Exit.
2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown.
Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears.
3Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.
4Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as
required for equipment transport.
Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
Follow the procedure in Table 5-8 to copy CAL files from a diskette to
the CBSC.
Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
nStep Action
1Login to the CBSC on the workstation using your account name and password.
NOTE
Enter the information that appears in bold text.
2Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.
3 Type eject –q and press the <Enter> key.
4 Type mount and press the <Enter> key.
Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.
NOTE
If the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a
number. Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.
5 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the <Enter> key.
6 Enter ls –lia and press the <Enter> key.
Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the diskette.
7 Enter cd and press the <Enter> key.
. . . continued on next page
5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
Mar 2001 5-9
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 5-8: Procedures to Copy CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC
nActionStep
8 Enter pwd and press the <Enter> key.
Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).
9 Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the <Enter> key (where # is the
BTS number).
10 Enter ls –l *.cal and press the <Enter> key.
Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.
11 Type eject and press the <Enter> key.
12 Remove the diskette from the workstation.
Re–establish OMC–R Control/
Verifying T1/E1
After all activities at the site have been completed, and
after disconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the
OMC–R and request the BTS be placed under control of
the OMC–R.
IMPORTANT
*5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
5-10
Notes
5
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Chapter 6: Basic Troubleshooting
Table of Contents
Basic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download CODE to Any Device (card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot ENABLE Device 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Load BLO 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Audit Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform TX Mask Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . .
Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-9.
Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–FER Test Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Description 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation 6-11.
No GPS Reference Source 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checksum Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Functionality 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Control Problems 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
DC Power Problems 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Status Indicators 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except
GLI2, CSM, BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E) 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSM LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BBX2 LED Status Combinations 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCC24/8E LED Status Combinations 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Basic Troubleshooting Overview
Mar 2001 6-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Overview
The information in this section addresses some of the scenarios likely to
be encountered by Cellular Field Engineering (CFE) team members.
This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference document
for use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basic
troubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not perform
per the procedure documented in the manual.
Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the field
and information gained form experience in Motorola labs and
classrooms.
6
Troubleshooting: Installation
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-2
Cannot Log into Cell-Site
Follow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot a login failure.
Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures
nStep Action
1If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 by re-seating it. If this
persists, install a known good MGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate
no Ethernet termination at top of frame.
2Verify that T1 is disconnected (see Table 3-1 on page 3-4).
If T1 is still connected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.
3Try pinging the MGLI2 (see Table 3-6 on page 3-15).
4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in the front of the BTS (see
Table 3-2 on page 3-5).
5Verify the LMF was configured properly (see Preparing the LMF section starting on page 3–6).
6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 [flexible black cable of less than 76 cm (2.5 feet) length].
7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly (see Figure 3-4 on page 3-14).
8Verify a T-adapter is not used on the LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primary
port.
9Try connecting to the I/O panel (top of frame). Use BNC T-adapters at the LMF port for this
connection.
10 Re-boot the LMF and retry.
11 Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.
12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly.
Cannot Communicate to
Power Meter
Follow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power meter
communication failure.
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
nStep Action
1Verify the Power Meter is connected to the LMF with a GPIB adapter.
2Verify the cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.
3Verify the GPIB address of the Power Meter is set to 13.
4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.
Refer to the Test Equipment setup section for details.
. . . continued on next page
6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued
Mar 2001 6-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure
nActionStep
5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Box
and retry.
6Verify that the Com1 port is not used by another application.
7Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode.
Cannot Communicate to
Communications Analyzer
Follow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communications
analyzer communication failure.
Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure
nStep Action
1Verify the analyzer is connected to the LMF with GPIB adapter.
2Verify the cable setup.
3Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.
4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct.
Refer to the Test Equipment setup section starting on page 3–34 for details.
5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be
‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIB Box
and retry.
6Verify that the Com1 port is not used by another application.
7If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.
6
Troubleshooting: Download
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-4
Cannot Download CODE to
Any Device (card)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot a code download
failure.
Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure
nStep Action
1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS.
2Verify the LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.
3Communication to the MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTS
device.
The MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).
4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.
5If the card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure.
Reset the card by re-seating it.
If the LED remains solid red, replace with a card from another slot & retry.
NOTE
The card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.
6Re-seat the card and try again.
7If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.
8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting the
device and Reset.
Cannot Download DATA to
Any Device (Card)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot a data download
failure.
Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure
nStep Action
1Re-seat the card and repeat code and data load procedure.
6
Troubleshooting: Download – continued
Mar 2001 6-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Cannot ENABLE Device
Before a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in the
OOS_RAM state (yellow) with data downloaded to the device. The color
of the device changes to green once it is enabled.
The three states that devices can be changed to are as follows:
SEnabled (green, INS)
SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)
SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot a device enable
failure.
Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure
nStep Action
1Re-seat the card and repeat the code and data load procedure.
2If the CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cell
site location and GPS sync.
3Ensure the primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.
NOTE
MCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.
4Verify the 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.
5The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.
6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time”, verify the CSM is operable.
Miscellaneous Errors
Perform the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot miscellaneous
failures.
Table 6-7: Miscellaneous Failures
nStep Action
1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect an
MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection (see Table 3-5 on page 3-11).
2 Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window.
The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.
(Call Field Support for further assistance.)
6
Troubleshooting: Calibration
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-6
Bay Level Offset Calibration
Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibration
failure.
Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure
nStep Action
1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section in Chapter 3)
and connection is made to the proper TX port.
2Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:
For 1900 MHz:
Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16; SSType=16
For 800 MHz:
Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=8; SSType=8
For 1700 MHz:
Bandclass=4; Freq_Band=128; SSType=16
3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
6Verify the sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Ref
signal.
7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display will show
“RES”.
6
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 6-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Cannot Load BLO
For Load BLO failures see Table 6-7.
Calibration Audit Failure
Follow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration audit
failure.
Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure
nStep Action
1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of
Chapter 3).
2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from the sensor
head.
3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED).
Reset the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power
Ref signal.
5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.
Click on the BBX(s) and select Device>Download BLO.
Re-try the audit.
6Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up.
Under normal conditions, only two green LEDs must be “ON” (Power and Ready).
If any other LED is continuously “ON”, power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GPIB Box and
retry.
6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-8
Cannot Perform TX Mask
Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-10 to troubleshoot a TX mask
measurement failure.
Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).
2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED).
Re-set the LPA by pulling the circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.
Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot
Time Offset Measurement
Follow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a rho or pilot time
offset measurement failure.
Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.
3 Re–load BBX data and repeat the test.
4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.
5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling the
circuit breaker and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.
6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that the GPS
is still phasing (i.e., trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error).
Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift–avg>
and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized
before going INS and may need to be re-initialized.
6
Troubleshooting – Transmit ATP – continued
Mar 2001 6-9
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Cannot Perform Code Domain
Power and Noise Floor
Measurement
Perform the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a code domain and
noise floor measurement failure.
Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.
2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.
3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure).
Cannot Perform Carrier
Measurement
Perform the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot a carrier
measurement failure.
Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure
nStep Action
1Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal.
2Verify High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly
connected to test set-up. 6
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-10
Multi–FER Test Failure
Perform the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot a Multi–FER
failure.
Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure
nStep Action
1Verify the test equipment set up is correct for an FER test.
2Verify the test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks.
On the HP8921A test set, the yellow LED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.
3Verify the MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.
4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).
5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable the MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of
failure).
6Verify the antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages.
6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist
Mar 2001 6-11
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Problem Description
Many of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) board failures may
be resolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for
repair. This section describes known CSM problems identified in field
returns, some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems before
returning suspect CSM boards.
Intermittent 19.6608 MHz
Reference Clock/GPS
Receiver Operation If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 or
SGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version
“AB”, then replace with version “BC” or higher, and return model “AB”
to the repair center.
No GPS Reference Source
Check the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kit
SGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit
SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectly
configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt to
change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPS
antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.
Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in a
non-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electrical
disturbance or interruption of data during a download. Attempt another
download with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return the CSM
board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload fails.
GPS Bad RX Message Type
This problem is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM
software (3.5 or higher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an
earlier version of CSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from
the CBSC. Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher.
Return the CSM board back to the repair center if the attempt to reload
fails.
CSM Reference Source
Configuration Error This problem is caused by incorrect reference source configuration
performed in the field by software download. CSM kits SGLN1145 and
SGLN4132 must have proper reference sources configured (as shown
below) to function correctly.
CSM Kit
No. Hardware
Configuration CSM Slot
No. Reference Source
Configuration CDF Value
SGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO 0
2 or 18
SGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPS
Backup = Either LFR or HSO 1
2 or 18
6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-12
Takes Too Long for CSM to
Come INS
This problem may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the
accuracy flag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system
time/GPS and LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least one
satellite should be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and four
satellites should be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also,
verify correct base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.
6
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting
Mar 2001 6-13
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Introduction
The C–CCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all the
C–CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possible
improper diagnoses when problems occur.
Connector Functionality
The following connector overview describes the major types of
backplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This
information allows the CFE to:
SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problem
type.
SIsolate problems to a specific cable or connector.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Inter Shelf Bus Connectors
The 40 pin Inter Shelf Bus (ISB) connectors provide an interface bus
from the master GLI2 to all other GLI2s in the modem frame. Their
basic function is to provide clock synchronization from the master GLI2
to all other GLI2s in the frame.
The ISB also provides the following functions:
SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cages.
SMMI connection to/from the master GLI2 to cell site modem.
SInterface between GLI2s and the AMR (for reporting BTS alarms).
Span Line Connector
The span line input is an 8–pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primary
and secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the C–CCP
shelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the Master
GLI2 and also all the BBX traffic.
Primary “A” and Redundant “B” Reference Distribution
Module Input/Output
The Reference Distribution Module (RDM) connectors route the 3 MHz
reference signals from the CSMs to the GLI2s and all BBXs in the
backplane. The signals are used to phase lock loop all clock circuits on
the GLI2s and BBX boards to produce precise clock and signal
frequencies.
Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)
Provides a +27 volt or –48 volt input for use by the power supply
modules.
. . . continued on next page
6
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-14
Power Supply Module Interface
Each power supply module has a series of three different connectors to
provide the needed inputs/outputs to the C–CCP backplane. These
include a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin
interface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The C–CCP
Power Modules convert +27 or –48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, and
+5.0 Volts to be used by the C–CCP shelf cards. In the –48 V BTS, the
LPA power modules convert –48 Volts to a regulated +27 Volts.
GLI2 Connector
This connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a
6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectors
provide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the C–CCP backplane.
GLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” Connections
These BNC connectors are located on the C–CCP backplane and routed
to the GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and data
communications between the master GLI2 and the other GLI2, between
gateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.
BBX Connector
Each BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connector
and two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,
digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C–CCP backplane.
CIO Connectors
SRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters
(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –
the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) to
the other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via the
C–CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to
the appropriate BBX.
SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to the
backplane, then on to the MCC slots.
SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCCs. Each output
is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriate BBX.
STX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane to
the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling to
the LPAs in the LPA shelf.
C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 provide procedures for troubleshooting
problems that appear to be related to a defective C–CCP backplane. The
tables are broken down into possible problems and steps that should be
taken in an attempt to find the root cause.
. . . continued on next page
6
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
Mar 2001 6-15
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table 6-15 through Table 6-24 must be completed before
replacing ANY C–CCP backplane.
IMPORTANT
*
Digital Control Problems
No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
Follow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot a GLI2 control via
LMF failure.
Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)
nStep Action
1Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
2Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)
Follow the procedures in Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 to troubleshoot
GLI2 control failures.
Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s)
Step Action
1Verify the C–CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.
2Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.
3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI2 for proper connection and
damage.
6Check the span line configuration on the MGLI2 (see Table 5-4 on page 5-4).
Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2
Step Action
1Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.
2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.
3Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
4Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
6
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-16
No AMR Control (MGLI2 good)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-18 to troubleshoot an AMR control
failure when the MGLI control is good.
Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR
Step Action
1Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.
2Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.
No BBX Control in the Shelf – (No Control over Co–located
GLI2s)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-19 to troubleshoot a BBX control in
the shelf failure.
Table 6-19: No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over Co–located GLI2s
Step Action
1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
3Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.
No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Perform the procedure in Table 6-20 to troubleshoot a span line traffic
failure.
Table 6-20: MGLI2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic
Step Action
1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.
3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.
4If the problem seems to be limited to one BBX, replace the MGLI2 with a known good MGLI2.
5Perform the BTS Span Parameter Configuration ( see Table 5-4 on page 5-4).
6Ensure that ISB cabling is correct.
6
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
Mar 2001 6-17
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
No (or Missing) MCC Channel Elements
Perform the procedure in Table 6-21 to troubleshoot a channel elements
failure.
Table 6-21: No MCC Channel Elements
Step Action
1Verify CEs on a co–located MCC (MCC24 TYPE=2)
2If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace the MCC with a known good MCC.
–Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.
3If no CEs on any MCC:
–Verify clock reference to CIO.
4Check the CDF for MCCTYPE=2 (MCC24) or MCCTYPE=0 (MCC8).
6
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-18
DC Power Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-22 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to power supply module failure.
Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to
the BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a
second person present, acting in a safety role. Remove all
rings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning this
test.
WARNING
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module
Step Action
1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame.
2Verify there are no breakers tripped.
* IMPORTANT
If a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker and
attempt to reset it.
–If the breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
–If the breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub–assembly within the shelf.
3Verify that the C–CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.
4Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C–CCP backplane by
measuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.
–If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.
–If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” power
feed clip on the distribution backplane.
–If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect the clip for damage.
5If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.
6Replace the power supply module with a known good module.
7If steps 1 through 5 fail to indicate a problem, a C–CCP backplane failure (possibly an open trace) has
occurred.
6
C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued
Mar 2001 6-19
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,
BBX, or Switchboard
Perform the procedure in Table 6-23 to troubleshoot a DC input voltage
to GLI2, BBX, or Switchboard failure.
Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module
Step Action
1Verify the steps in Table 6-22 have been performed.
2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.
3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.
TX and RX Signal Routing
Problems
Perform the procedure in Table 6-24 to troubleshoot TX and RX signal
routing problems.
Table 6-24: TX and RX Signal Routing Problems
Step Action
1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–plane connectors for damage in all the affected board
slots.
2Perform steps in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-20
Module Status Indicators
Each of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)
LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator is
labeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.
Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm
(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.
Based on the status of this signal, the AMR controls the state of the
PWR/ALM LED on the fan module.
LED Status Combinations for
All Modules (except GLI2,
CSM, BBX, MCC)
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the module status indicator.
SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware failure.
Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a complete
module failure and normal service may or may not be reduced or
interrupted.
DC/DC Converter LED Status
Combinations
The PWR CNVTR has alarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls the
state of the PWR/ALM LED. This is true for both the C–CCP and LPA
power converters.
PWR/ALM LED
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.
SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.
SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due to
electrical hardware problem.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
Mar 2001 6-21
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
CSM LED Status
Combinations PWR/ALM LED
The CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware and
software/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.
After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the Flash
EPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loaded
from the Flash EPROM.
SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.
SSolid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)
condition.
SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.
SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in
DUMB mode.
SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.
SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.
SOff – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.
SSolid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. During
SRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (If
SRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED and
the CSM attempts to reboot.)
PWR/ALM
Indicator
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
FW00303
Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports
. . . continued on next page
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-22
FREQ Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. When
both CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2
clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.
The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm
(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.
SYNC Monitor Connector
A test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allows
monitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by the
CSMs.
At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulse
width of 153 nanoseconds.
MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232
MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the development
or factory environment, but may be used in the field for
debug/maintenance purposes.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
Mar 2001 6-23
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
GLI2 LED Status
Combinations
The GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as described
below and shown in Figure 6-2.
The operating states of the 5 LEDs are:
ACTIVE
Solid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelf
control and is providing control of the digital interfaces.
Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should be
active.
MASTER
SSolid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).
SOff – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).
ALARM
SSolid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.
SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 is
performing ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).
SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 is
performing RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).
SOff – No Alarm.
STATUS
SFlashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operating
condition.
SOn – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.
SOff – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.
SPANS
SSolid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.
SSolid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-24
GLI2 Pushbuttons and
Connectors RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes a
partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. The GLI2 is
placed in the OOS_ROM state
MMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be
used primarily in the development or factory environment but may be
used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.
LAN Connectors (A & B) – The two 10BASE2 Ethernet circuit board
mounted BNC connectors are located on the bottom front edge of the
GLI2; one for each LAN interface, A & B. Ethernet cabling is connected
to tee connectors fastened to these BNC connectors.
Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
ACTIVE LED
STATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVE
STATUS LED
RESET
PUSHBUTTON
ALARM LED
SPANS LED
MASTER LED
STATUS OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
RESET
ALARM OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.
SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)
SPANS
MASTER
MMI PORT
CONNECTOR
ACTIVE
LED OPERATING STATUS
All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasing
the switch.
ON - operating normally in active card
OFF - operating normally in standby card
Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundant
card toggles automatically if the active card is removed or fails
ON - active card operating normally
OFF - standby card operating normally
The pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in the
top shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card in
the bottom shelf is in the standby mode.
OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standby
GREEN - operating normally
YELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receiving
a remote alarm indication signal from the far end
RED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarm
state
An RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use as
an MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of
115,200 baud communications.
FW00225
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
Mar 2001 6-25
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
BBX LED Status
Combinations
PWR/ALM LED
The BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry that
controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.
The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:
SSolid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarm
SSolid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarm
SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm
SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm
SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm
SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm
SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarm
MCC LED Status
Combinations
The MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as described
below (see Figure 6-3). Note that the figure does not show the
connectors as they are concealed by the removable lens.
The LED indicators and their states are as follows:
PWR/ALM LED
SRED – fault on module
ACTIVE LED
SOff – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.
SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.
SRapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.
SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.
PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs
SSolid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.
MMI Connectors
SThe RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development or factory environment but may be used
in the field for debugging purposes.
SThe RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be used
primarily in the development environment but may be used in the field
for high data rate debugging purposes.
. . . continued on next page
6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-26
Figure 6-3: MCC Front Panel
PWR/ALM LED
LENS
(REMOVABLE)
ACTIVE LED
PWR/ALM ACTIVE
PWR/ALM OFF - operating normally
ON - briefly during powerĆup and during failure
ąconditions
ACTIVE
LED OPERATING STATUS
RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded but
ąnot enabled
SLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloaded
ON - card is codeĆloaded and enabled
ą(INS_ACTIVE)
COLOR
GREEN
RED
RED ON - fault condition
SLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHI
ąbus inactive on powerĆup
An alarm is generated in the event of a failure
FW00224
LPA Shelf LED Status
Combinations
LPA Module LED
Each LPA module contains a bi–color LED just above the MMI
connector on the front panel of the module. Interpret this LED as
follows:
SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normal
condition).
SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting an
low input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal and
does not constitute a failure.
6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link
Mar 2001 6-27
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Span Problems (No Control
Link)
Perform the procedure in Table 6-25 to troubleshoot a control link
failure.
Table 6-25: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure
nStep Action
1Verify the span settings using the span_view command on the active master GLI2 MMI port. If
these are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command. Any alarms conditions
indicate that the span is not operating correctly.
–Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the Mobility Manager (MM) and
verify that the looped signal is good.
–Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from Base Site and MM.
2If no traffic channels in groomed MCCs (or in whole C–CCP shelf) can process calls, verify that
the ISB cabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.
6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
6-28
Notes
6
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix A: Data Sheets
Appendix Content
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Optimization Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPA Convergence A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification
for 3–Sector Configurations A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification
for 6–Sector Configurations A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TX Antenna VSWR A-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMR Verification A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site Serial Number Check List A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–CCP Shelf A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPAs A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only) A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets
Mar 2001 A-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Verification of Test Equipment
Used
Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used
Manufacturer Model Serial Number
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-2
Site Checklist
Table A-2: Site Checklist
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Deliveries Per established procedures
-Floor Plan Verified
-
-
-
Inter Frame Cables:
Ethernet
Frame Ground
Power
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
-
-
-
Factory Data:
BBX
Test Panel
RFDS
Per procedure
Per procedure
Per procedure
-Site Temperature
-Dress Covers/Brackets
Preliminary Operations
Table A-3: Preliminary Operations
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage
-BBX Jumpers Verified per procedure
-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedure
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Pre–Power and Initial Power
Tests
Table A-4: Pre–power Checklist
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Pre–power–up tests Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Internal Cables:
ISB (all cages)
CSM (all cages)
Power (all cages)
Ethernet Connectors
LAN A ohms
LAN B ohms
LAN A shield
LAN B shield
Ethernet Boots
verified
verified
verified
verified
verified
isolated
isolated
installed
-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed
-Initial power–up tests Verify power supply
output voltage at the top
of each BTS frame is
within specifications:
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-4
General Optimization
Checklist
Table A-5: Pre–power Checklist
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-
-
LEDs
Frame fans
illuminated
operational
-
-
-
-
-
-
LMF to BTS Connection
Preparing the LMF
Log into the LMF PC
Create site specific BTS directory
Create master–bts–cdma directory
Download device loads
Moving/Linking files
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
-
-
Ping LAN A
Ping LAN B
per procedure
per procedure
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Download/Enable MGLI2s
Download/Enable GLI2s
Set Site Span Configuration
Download CSMs
Download
Enable CSMs
Download/Enable MCCs
Download BBXs
Download TSU (in RFDS)
Program TSU NAM
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
per procedure
-Test Set Calibration per procedure
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
GPS Receiver Operation
Table A-6: GPS Receiver Operation
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-GPS Receiver Control Task State:
tracking satellites
Verify parameter
-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimated
or Surveyed
-Current Position:
lat
lon
height
RECORD in ms
and cm also
convert to deg
min sec
-Current Position: satellites tracked
Estimated:
(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Surveyed:
(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visible
Verify parameter
as appropriate:
-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution of
Precision
(PDOP or HDOP): (<30)
Verify parameter
-Current reference source:
Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameter
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-6
LFR Receiver Operation
Table A-7: LFR Receiver Operation
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-Station call letters M X Y Z
assignment. as specified in site
documentation
-SN ratio is > 8 dB
-LFR Task State: 1fr
locked to station xxxx
Verify parameter
-Current reference source:
Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: Yes
Verify parameter
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
LPA IM Reduction
Table A-8: LPA IM Reduction
Parameter Comments
CARRIER
OK LPA
#4:1 & 2:1
3–Sector 2:1
6–Sector Dual BP
3–Sector Dual BP
6–Sector
Specification
-1A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms
-1B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms
-1C C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms
-1D C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms
-2A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms
-2B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms
-2C C2 C2 C2 No Alarms
-2D C2 C2 C2 No Alarms
-3A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms
-3B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms
-3C C3 C1 C1 No Alarms
-3D C3 C1 C1 No Alarms
-4A C4 C2 No Alarms
-4B C4 C2 No Alarms
-4C C4 C2 No Alarms
-4D C4 C2 No Alarms
Comments:_________________________________________________________
Cx – denotes physical carriers
For applied frequency requirements, see Appendix E.
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-8
LPA Convergence
Table A-9: LPA Convergence
OK Parameter Specification Data
LPA # Converged
-1A Verify per procedure & upload
-1B convergence data
-1C
-1D
-2A Verify per procedure & upload
-2B convergence data
-2C
-2D
-3A Verify per procedure & upload
-3B convergence data
-3C
-3D
-4A Verify per procedure & upload
-4B convergence data
-4C
-4D
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-9
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
TX Bay Level Offset/Power
Output Verification for
3–Sector Configurations 1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–4, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–5, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX–6, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–10, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–11, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX–12, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
. . . continued on next page
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-10
Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK CommentsSpecificationParameter
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier 1
BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier 2
BBX–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–4, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–5, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier 3
BBX–6, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–10, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–11, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier 4
BBX–12, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-11
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
2–Carrier Adjacent Channel
Table A-11: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–7, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration
BBX–8, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX–9, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier 1
BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–7, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–8, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-
carrier 2
BBX–9, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-12
3–Carrier Adjacent Channels
4–Carrier Adjacent Channels
Table A-12: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-BBX–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–4, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–5, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX–6, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
-BBX–10, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–3, ANT–4 = dB
-Calibrate
carrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (+4 dB)
prior to calibration
BBX–11, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX–12, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 1
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier 1
BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
. . . continued on next page
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-13
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table A-12: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 3 or 4–Carrier Adjacent Channels)
OK CommentsSpecificationParameter
-BBX–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 2
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-
carrier 2
BBX–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-BBX–4, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 3
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–5, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-
carrier 3
BBX–6, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
-BBX–10, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-
Calibration
Audit
carrier 4
0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
post calibration
BBX–11, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-
carrier 4
BBX–12, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-14
TX Bay Level Offset/Power
Output Verification for
6–Sector Configurations 1–Carrier
2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels
Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK Parameter Specification Comments
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-
carrier 1 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX–4, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-BBX–5, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX–6, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
-BBX–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-BBX–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),
BBX–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-
carrier 2 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX–10, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–3, ANT–4 = dB
-BBX–11, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX–12, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
. . . continued on next page
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-15
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table A-13: TX BLO Calibration (6–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)
OK CommentsSpecificationParameter
-BBX–1, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-BBX–2, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
BBX–3, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-
Audit
carrier 1 post calibration BBX–4, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-BBX–5, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX–6, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
-BBX–7, ANT–1 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–1 = dB
-BBX–8, ANT–2 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–2 = dB
-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolution
BBX–9, ANT–3 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–3 = dB
-
Audit
carrier 2 post calibration BBX–10, ANT–4 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–4 = dB
-BBX–11, ANT–5 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–5 = dB
-BBX–12, ANT–6 = dB
BBX–r, ANT–6 = dB
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-16
BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
Table A-14: BTS Redundancy/Alarm Tests
OK Parameter Specification Data
-SIF: Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure
-MGLI2 redundancy test Verify per procedure
-GLI2 redundancy test Verify per procedure
-Power supply/converter
redundancy Verify per procedure
-Misc. alarm tests Verify per procedure
-CSM, GPS, & LFR
redundancy/alarm tests Verify per procedure
-LPA redundancy test Verify per procedure
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
TX Antenna VSWR
Table A-15: TX Antenna VSWR
OK Parameter Specification Data
-VSWR –
Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)
Comments:________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
A
Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued
Mar 2001 A-17
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
RX Antenna VSWR
Table A-16: RX Antenna VSWR
OK Parameter Specification Data
-VSWR –
Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)
-VSWR –
Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)
Comments:_________________________________________________________
AMR Verification
Table A-17: AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification
OK Parameter Specification Data
-
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM A”
(numbers 1 –18)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
-
Verify CDI alarm input
operation (“ALARM B”
(numbers 19 –36)
BTS Relay #XX –
Contact Alarm
Sets/Clears
Comments:_________________________________________________________
A
Site Serial Number Check List
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-18
Date Site
C–CCP Shelf
Site I/O A & B
C–CCP Shelf
CSM–1
CSM–2
HSO
CCD–1
CCD–2
AMR–1
AMR–2
MPC–1
MPC–2
Fans 1–3
GLI2–1
GLI2–2
BBX–1
BBX–2
BBX–3
BBX–4
BBX–5
BBX–6
BBX–7
BBX–8
BBX–9
BBX–10
BBX–11
BBX–12
BBX–r
MCC–1
MCC–2
MCC–3
MCC–4
MCC–5
MCC–6
MCC–7
MCC–8
MCC–9
. . . continued on next page
A
Site Serial Number Check List – continued
Mar 2001 A-19
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
MCC–1–10
MCC–11
MCC–1–12
CIO
SWITCH
PS–1
PS–2
PS–3
LPAs
LPA 1A
LPA 1B
LPA 1C
LPA 1D
LPA 2A
LPA 2B
LPA 2C
LPA 2D
LPA 3A
LPA 3B
LPA 3C
LPA 3D
LPA 4A
LPA 4B
LPA 4C
LPA 4D
Power Conversion Shelf
(–48 V BTS Only)
AMR
PS 4
PS 5
PS 6
PS 7
PS 8
PS 9
A
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
A-20
Notes
A
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix B: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information
Appendix Content
Appendix B: PN Offset Programming Information B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Background B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PN Offset Usage B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
B
PN Offset Programming Information
Mar 2001 B-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
PN Offset Background
All channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHz
CDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walsh
code functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair of
PN sequences unique to each sector.
Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmitted
from the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronize
to the next strongest sector.
The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where the corresponding
I & Q registers reside.
The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)
basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown of
this information is found in Table B-1.
PN Offset Usage
Only the 14–chip delay is currently in use. It is important to determine
the RF chip delay to be able to test the BTS functionality. This can be
done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on”
when the MCC was downloaded with “image data”. The FineTxAdj
value is used to compensate for the processing delay (approximately
20 mS) in the BTS using any type of mobile meeting IS–97
specifications.
If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj has
been set for the 14 chip table.
CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL
or HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If
necessary, convert HEX values in Table B-1 to decimal
before comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.
IMPORTANT
*
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
B-2
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3
1 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D
2 4700 17398 125C 43F6
3 14406 26333 3846 66DD
4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB
5 17025 2256 4281 08D0
6 14745 18651 3999 48DB
7 2783 1094 0ADF 0446
8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2
9 12407 13841 3077 3611
10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17
11 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA
12 18523 30999 485B 7917
13 29920 22420 74E0 5794
14 25184 20168 6260 4EC8
15 26282 12354 66AA 3042
16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3
17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A
18 23026 10395 59F2 289B
19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83
20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07
21 1557 22087 0615 5647
22 30262 2077 7636 081D
23 18000 13758 4650 35BE
24 20056 11778 4E58 2E02
25 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7
26 17437 7184 441D 1C10
27 17438 2362 441E 093A
28 5102 25840 13EE 64F0
29 9302 12177 2456 2F91
30 17154 10402 4302 28A2
31 5198 1917 144E 077D
32 4606 17708 11FE 452C
33 24804 10630 60E4 2986
34 17180 6812 431C 1A9C
35 10507 14350 290B 380E
36 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7
37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB
38 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C
39 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA
40 10030 2010 272E 07DA
41 16984 25936 4258 6550
42 14225 28531 3791 6F73
43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0
44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB
45 30100 25589 7594 63F5
46 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51
47 14199 28198 3777 6E26
48 17637 13947 44E5 367B
49 23081 8462 5A29 210E
50 5099 9595 13EB 257B
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Mar 2001 B-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E
52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950
53 7699 29415 1E13 72E7
54 19339 20610 4B8B 5082
55 28212 6479 6E34 194F
56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD
57 19715 18426 4D03 47FA
58 14901 22726 3A35 58C6
59 20160 5247 4EC0 147F
60 22249 29953 56E9 7501
61 26582 5796 67D6 16A4
62 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD
63 15127 4528 3B17 11B0
64 15274 5415 3BAA 1527
65 23149 10294 5A6D 2836
66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296
67 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6
68 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A
69 10620 13814 297C 35F6
70 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6
71 27966 795 6D3E 031B
72 12479 9774 30BF 262E
73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3
74 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64
75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5
76 17888 21283 45E0 5323
77 13117 16905 333D 4209
78 7506 7062 1D52 1B96
79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C
80 31109 25575 7985 63E7
81 29755 14244 743B 37A4
82 26711 28053 6857 6D95
83 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8
84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6
85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E
86 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7
87 23466 174 5BAA 00AE
88 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA
89 25798 2320 64C6 0910
90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49
91 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1
92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C
93 21508 1826 5404 0722
94 26338 30853 66E2 7885
95 17186 15699 4322 3D53
96 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D
97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8
98 25390 18163 632E 46F3
99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B
100 9620 8670 2594 21DE
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
B-4
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
101 6491 1290 195B 050A
102 16876 4407 41EC 1137
103 17034 1163 428A 048B
104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7
105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55
106 8382 8978 20BE 2312
107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB
108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A
109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE
110 15682 6222 3D42 184E
111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74
112 8521 25094 2149 6206
113 30232 23380 7618 5B54
114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE
115 27116 22821 69EC 5925
116 4238 31634 108E 7B92
117 5128 4403 1408 1133
118 14846 689 39FE 02B1
119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5
120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5
121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3
122 13811 22338 35F3 5742
123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E
124 1213 22096 04BD 5650
125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60
126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7
127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD
128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8
129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880
130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE
131 594 13555 0252 34F3
132 25804 8789 64CC 2255
133 31013 24821 7925 60F5
134 32585 21068 7F49 524C
135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93
136 17231 5321 434F 14C9
137 31554 551 7B42 0227
138 8764 12115 223C 2F53
139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326
140 13428 1991 3474 07C7
141 17658 14404 44FA 3844
142 13475 17982 34A3 463E
143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E
144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A
145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F
146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36
147 1377 29094 0561 71A6
148 28654 653 6FEE 028D
149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3
150 16770 23588 4182 5C24
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Mar 2001 B-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E
152 25685 31060 6455 7954
153 21356 30875 536C 789B
154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8
155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1
156 22898 9586 5972 2572
157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8
158 30010 30389 753A 76B5
159 2365 7298 093D 1C82
160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6
161 29740 23137 742C 5A61
162 5665 24597 1621 6015
163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05
164 1680 7764 0690 1E54
165 25861 14518 6505 38B6
166 25712 21634 6470 5482
167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A
168 26887 26454 6907 6756
169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42
170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A
171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F
172 31555 758 7B43 02F6
173 29171 16528 71F3 4090
174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97
175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0
176 30270 17698 763E 4522
177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5
178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA
179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F
180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78
181 15873 26696 3E01 6848
182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B
183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7
184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6
185 22977 9737 59C1 2609
186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6
187 10637 30643 298D 77B3
188 25454 13230 636E 33AE
189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9
190 6368 2055 18E0 0807
191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F
192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC
193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD
194 889 6074 0379 17BA
195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D
196 20520 15880 5028 3E08
197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93
198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA
199 21639 816 5487 0330
200 31120 22309 7990 5725
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
B-6
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
201 3698 29563 0E72 737B
202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316
203 17429 10460 4415 28DC
204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6
205 17808 20277 4590 4F35
206 30068 19988 7574 4E14
207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D
208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5
209 20371 6024 4F93 1788
210 13829 20520 3605 5028
211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF
212 25732 26063 6484 65CF
213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43
214 5187 6614 1443 19D6
215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA
216 28242 5511 6E52 1587
217 6243 17119 1863 42DF
218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0
219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E
220 13256 4660 33C8 1234
221 18472 13881 4828 3639
222 25945 16819 6559 41B3
223 31051 6371 794B 18E3
224 1093 24673 0445 6061
225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7
226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719
227 29833 5957 7489 1745
228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D
229 24813 22155 60ED 568B
230 47 15050 002F 3ACA
231 3202 16450 0C82 4042
232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB
233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0
234 25297 17153 62D1 4301
235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9
236 28519 30581 6F67 7775
237 4991 3600 137F 0E10
238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001
239 17728 671 4540 029F
240 14415 20774 384F 5126
241 30976 24471 7900 5F97
242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD
243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC
244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE
245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521
246 8307 26143 2073 661F
247 12918 13359 3276 342F
248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A
249 24873 13747 6129 35B3
250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Mar 2001 B-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
251 13904 1056 3650 0420
252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585
253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF
254 16820 4951 41B4 1357
255 22479 749 57CF 02ED
256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3
257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1
258 19332 2358 4B84 0936
259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE
260 14698 31198 396A 79DE
261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB
262 30475 8862 770B 229E
263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7
264 1912 7443 0778 1D13
265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E
266 15705 25093 3D59 6205
267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB
268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F
269 16779 32545 418B 7F21
270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8
271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77
272 8322 10378 2082 288A
273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9
274 26934 5125 6936 1405
275 18806 12528 4976 30F0
276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF
277 9245 20959 241D 51DF
278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0
279 18684 26453 48FC 6755
280 8220 29421 201C 72ED
281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB
282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B
283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC
284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4
285 12417 26028 3081 65AC
286 30901 29852 78B5 749C
287 9366 14978 2496 3A82
288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96
289 21458 25143 53D2 6237
290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE
291 8999 5336 2327 14D8
292 26718 21885 685E 557D
293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051
294 27961 30097 6D39 7591
295 28465 21877 6F31 5575
296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25
297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC
298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC
299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567
300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
B-8
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
301 17418 30173 440A 75DD
302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B
303 52 5371 0034 14FB
304 27254 10242 6A76 2802
305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94
306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A
307 377 19550 0179 4C5E
308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2
309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1
310 26629 10898 6805 2A92
311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53
312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13
313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE
314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7
315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0
316 25560 4381 63D8 111D
317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32
318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97
319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB
320 26334 9037 66DE 234D
321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62
322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF
323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F
324 4244 16872 1094 41E8
325 8499 9072 2133 2370
326 9362 12966 2492 32A6
327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6
328 30957 25118 78ED 621E
329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8
330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49
331 1153 20983 0481 51F7
332 29304 12372 7278 3054
333 6041 13948 1799 367C
334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B
335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8
336 10096 17354 2770 43CA
337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB
338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A
339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D
340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD
341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743
342 25501 10346 639D 286A
343 4489 13200 1189 3390
344 31011 30402 7923 76C2
345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F
346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A
347 11846 21398 2E46 5396
348 30331 31104 767B 7980
349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0
350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Mar 2001 B-9
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
351 29572 5578 7384 15CA
352 13173 25731 3375 6483
353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6
354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C
355 12083 31098 2F33 797A
356 22822 16408 5926 4018
357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA
358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F
359 10205 14732 27DD 398C
360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8
361 22098 1476 5652 05C4
362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD
363 4408 21118 1138 527E
364 102 22198 0066 56B6
365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E
366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B
367 26967 25802 6957 64CA
368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0
369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38
370 655 24248 028F 5EB8
371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7
372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72
373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452
374 8535 1806 2157 070E
375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B
376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68
377 21538 25755 5422 649B
378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A
379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB
380 14717 29096 397D 71A8
381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE
382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95
383 5008 25525 1390 63B5
384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1
385 22175 28855 569F 70B7
386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC
387 22546 20373 5812 4F95
388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD
389 133 26155 0085 662B
390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D
391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6
392 1397 21479 0575 53E7
393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA
394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37
395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C
396 5904 20626 1710 5092
397 24341 423 5F15 01A7
398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77
399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1
400 1862 10818 0746 2A42
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
B-10
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22
402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A
403 12589 14629 312D 3925
404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7
405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677
406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40
407 17000 29492 4268 7334
408 21913 5719 5599 1657
409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3
410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C
411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417
412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D
413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6
414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6
415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72
416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102
417 17435 9075 441B 2373
418 18527 32265 485F 7E09
419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67
420 18783 17434 495F 441A
421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92
422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D
423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC
424 10004 25384 2714 6328
425 13459 18908 3493 49DC
426 13383 25816 3447 64D8
427 28930 4661 7102 1235
428 4860 31115 12FC 798B
429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B
430 24161 1311 5E61 051F
431 20067 16471 4E63 4057
432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B
433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0
434 28743 21062 7047 5246
435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA
436 249 10141 00F9 279D
437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46
438 29682 22141 73F2 567D
439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C
440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724
441 26706 30663 6852 77C7
442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C
443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4
444 5762 10228 1682 27F4
445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0
446 21882 18045 557A 467D
447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361
448 206 27066 00CE 69BA
449 28798 13740 707E 35AC
450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
Mar 2001 B-11
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
451 13463 3684 3497 0E64
452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3
453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2
454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5
455 23429 9816 5B85 2658
456 12990 4444 32BE 115C
457 12421 5664 3085 1620
458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE
459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80
460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0
461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8
462 30109 29971 759D 7513
463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51
464 4862 16910 12FE 420E
465 14091 20739 370B 5103
466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF
467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213
468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F
469 21379 10072 5383 2758
470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57
471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64
472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0
473 10147 29799 27A3 7467
474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8
475 17359 263 43CF 0107
476 13248 24734 33C0 609E
477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7
478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A
479 10345 25116 2869 621C
480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5
481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940
482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F
483 8808 28728 2268 7038
484 12744 25092 31C8 6204
485 11618 22601 2D62 5849
486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7
487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD
488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE
489 31892 17739 7C94 454B
490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163
491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA
492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2
493 18208 16870 4720 41E6
494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23
495 21901 18400 558D 47E0
496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47
497 18994 1937 4A32 0791
498 13608 17963 3528 462B
499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E
500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A
. . . continued on next page
B
PN Offset Programming Information – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
B-12
Table B-1: PnMask I and PnMask Q Values for PilotPn
14–Chip Delay
Pilot I Q I Q
PN (Dec.) (Hex.)
501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48
502 23380 29989 5B54 7525
503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E
504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB
505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF
506 14473 28919 3889 70F7
507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C
508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104
509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A
510 1058 2224 0422 08B0
511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB
B
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Appendix Content
Appendix C: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix
Mar 2001 C-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Usage & Background
Periodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization of
specific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines is
included in the following tables.
Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in
the tables below must be performed anytime an RF cable
associated with it is replaced.
IMPORTANT
*
BTS Frame
Table C-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS
Item Replaced Optimize:
C–CCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to all
Combined CDMA Channel Processor
(C–CCP) shelves.
Multicoupler/
Preselector Card The three or six affected sector RX paths for
the C–CCP shelf in the BTS frames.
Preselector I/O All sector RX paths.
BBX board RX and TX paths of the affected C–CCP
shelf / BBX board.
CIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affected
CDMA carrier.
Any LPA Module The affected sector TX path.
LPA Backplane The affected sector TX path.
LPA Filter The affected sector TX path.
Ancillary Frame
Item Replaced Optimize:
Directional Coupler All affected sector RX and TX paths to all
BTS frame shelves.
Site filter All affected RX sector paths in all shelves
in all BTS frames.
Any RFDS component
or TSU. The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths
(MONFWD/GENFWD).
. . . continued on next page
C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
C-2
Inter-frame Cabling
Optimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cabling
between BTS frames.
Table C-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling
Item Replaced Optimize:
Ancillary frame to BTS
frame (RX) cables The affected sector/antenna RX
paths.
BTS frame to ancillary frame
(TX) cables The affected sector/antenna TX paths.
Detailed Optimization/ATP
Test Matrix
Table C-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to be
performed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. It
is also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMF
until full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.
The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.
Not every procedure required to bring the site back on line
is indicated in Table C-3. It is meant to be used as a
guideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar
enough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to
understand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, and
BTS site preparation will be required before performing the
Table # procedures referenced.
IMPORTANT
*
Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directional
couplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibration
audit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TX
path calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to be
repeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting is
warranted.
Whenever any C–CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that
only power to the C–CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the
breaker supplying that shelf.
Whenever any DISTRIBUTION BACKPLANE is replaced it is assumed
that the power to the entire RFM frame is removed and the Preselector
I/O is replaced. The modem frame should be brought up as if it were a
new installation.
. . . continued on next page
C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
Mar 2001 C-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
If any significant change in signal level results from any
component being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow
paths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TX
calibration audit command.
NOTE
When the CIO is replaced, the C–CCP shelf remains powered up. The
BBX boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into their
original slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TX
calibration audits should then be performed.
. . . continued on next page
C
FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
C-4
Table C-3: SC 4812T BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix
Doc
Tbl
#page
Description
Directional Coupler (RX)
Directional Coupler (TX)
RX Filter
RX Cables
TX Cables
Multicoupler/Preselector
CIO
C–CCP Backplane
BBX2
MCC24/MCC8E
CSM
LFR/HSO
GPS
GLI2
LPA
LPA Filter Bandpass
Power Converters (See Note)
SWITCH CARD
LPA Combiner Filter 2:1
LPA Combiner Filter 4:1
LPA Backplane
Table 2-1 2-2
Initial Boards/Modules
Install, Preliminary
Operations, CDF Site
Equipage; etc.
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Table 2-2
Table 2-5 2-5
2-13 DC Power Pre-Test
Physical Inspect D D
Table 2-7 2-14 Initial Power-up D D
Table 3-6 3-15 Ping the Processors D D D D D D
Table 3-12 3-28 Download/Enable
MGLI2s D D
Table 3-12 3-28 Download/Enable GLIs D D
Table 3-13 3-29 Download CSMs D D D
Table 3-13 3-29 Download MCCs, D D D
Table 3-13 3-29 Download BBXs D D
Table 3-15 3-31 Enable CSMs D D
Table 3-16 3-32 Enable MCCs D D
Table 3-19 3-37 GPS Initialization /
Verification D D D
Table 3-20 3-41 LFR Initialization /
Verification D D
Table 3-21 3-43 HSO
Initialization/Verification D D
Table 3-34 3-70 TX Path Calibration D D D
Table 3-35 3-71 Download Offsets to BBX D D D
Table 3-36 3-73 TX Path Calibration Audit D D D D D D D D D D D
Table 4-1 4-3 Spectral Purity TX Mask
ATP D D D D D D D D
Table 4-1 4-3 Waveform Quality (rho)
ATP D D D D D D D D D D
Table 4-1 4-3 Pilot Time Offset ATP D D D D D D D D D D
Table 4-1 4-3 Code Domain Power /
Noise Floor DDD
Table 4-1 4-3 FER Test DDDDD
NOTE
Replace power converters one card at a time so that power to the C–CCP or LPA shelf is not lost. If power to
the C–CCP shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.
C
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Appendix Content
Appendix D: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations D-1. . . . . . . . .
Usage & Background D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
D
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations
Mar 2001 D-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Usage & Background
Table D-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domain
channel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and the
BBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultant RF
output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in the table.
The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) values have
been calculated.
As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrier
with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gain
is set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlate
exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm output
range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm'
Gainb
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
541 –––––––43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3
533 –––––––43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2
525 – – – – – – 44 43 42 41 40 39
517 – – – – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9
509 – – – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8
501 – – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6
493 – – – – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5
485 – – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4
477 – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2
469 – – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1
461 –––––43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9
453 –––––43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8
445 –––––43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6
437 –––––43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4
429 –––––43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3
421 –––––43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1
413 – – – – 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
405 – – – – 43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8
397 – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6
389 – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4
. . . continued on next page
D
BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
D-2
Table D-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)
dBm'
Gainb
333435363738394041424344
381 – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3
374 – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1
366 – – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9
358 – – – 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7
350 – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5
342 – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3
334 – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1
326 – – 43.9 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9
318 – – 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7
310 – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5
302 – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2
294 –44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
286 –43.8 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8
278 –43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5
270 –43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3
262 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
254 43.7 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 –
246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 –
238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 –
230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 – –
222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 – –
214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 – –
D
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix E: CDMA Operating Frequency Information
Appendix Content
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North
American PCS Bands E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1900 MHz PCS Channels E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800 MHz CDMA Channels E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies E-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean Bands E-6. . . .
1700 MHz PCS Channels E-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating 1700 MHz Center Frequencies E-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
PCS Bands
Mar 2001 E-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Introduction
Programming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by the
BTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines the
transmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) for
each BBX.
1900 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS
1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure E-1: North American PCS 1900 MHz Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
FREQ (MHz)
RX TX
275
1175
CHANNEL
1863.75
925
1851.2525
1871.25425
675 1883.75
1896.25
1908.75
1943.75
1931.25
1951.25
1963.75
1976.25
1988.75
A
D
B
E
F
C
. . . continued on next page
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
E-2
Calculating 1900 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHz
SRX = TX – 80
Example: Channel 262
RX = 1943.10 – 80 = 1863.10 MHz
Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequency
plan.
Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band on
both sides of the carrier.
Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier and
the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
25 0019 1931.25 1851.25
50 0032 1932.50 1852.50
75 004B 1933.75 1853.75
100 0064 1935.00 1855.00
125 007D 1936.25 1856.25
150 0096 1937.50 1857.50
175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75
200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00
225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25
250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50
275 0113 1943.75 1863.75
300 012C 1945.00 1865.00
325 0145 1946.25 1866.25
350 015E 1947.50 1867.50
375 0177 1948.75 1868.75
400 0190 1950.00 1870.00
425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25
450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50
475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75
500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00
. . . continued on next page
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Mar 2001 E-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table E-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
525 020D 1956.25 1876.25
550 0226 1957.50 1877.50
575 023F 1958.75 1878.75
600 0258 1960.00 1880.00
625 0271 1961.25 1881.25
650 028A 1962.50 1882.50
675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75
700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00
725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25
750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50
775 0307 1968.75 1888.75
800 0320 1970.00 1890.00
825 0339 1971.25 1891.25
850 0352 1972.50 1892.50
875 036B 1973.75 1893.75
900 0384 1975.00 1895.00
925 039D 1976.25 1896.25
950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50
975 03CF 1978.75 1898.75
1000 03E8 1980.00 1900.00
1025 0401 1981.25 1901.25
1050 041A 1982.50 1902.50
1075 0433 1983.75 1903.75
1100 044C 1985.00 1905.00
1125 0465 1986.25 1906.25
1150 047E 1987.50 1807.50
1175 0497 1988.75 1908.75
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
E-4
800 MHz CDMA Channels
Figure E-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellular
telephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline or
non–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique per
customer operating system).
Figure E-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
RX FREQ
(MHz)
991
1023
1
333
334
666
667
716
717
799
CHANNEL
OVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDS
OVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS
824.040
825.000
825.030
834.990
835.020
844.980
845.010
846.480
846.510
848.970
869.040
870.000
870.030
879.990
880.020
889.980
890.010
891.480
891.510
893.970
TX FREQ
(MHz)
1013
694
689
311
356
644
739
777
CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BAND
CDMA WIRELINE (B) BAND
FW00402
Calculating 800 MHz Center
Frequencies
Table E-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operating
channels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the corresponding
transmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) for
channels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:
SChannels 1–777
TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#
Example: Channel 262
TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHz
SChannels 1013–1023
TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)
Example: Channel 1015
TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHz
SRX = TX – 45 MHz
Example: Channel 262
RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHz
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
1 0001 870.0300 825.0300
25 0019 870.7500 825.7500
. . . continued on next page
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American
Bands – continued
Mar 2001 E-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table E-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
50 0032 871.5000 826.5000
75 004B 872.2500 827.2500
100 0064 873.0000 828.0000
125 007D 873.7500 828.7500
150 0096 874.5000 829.5000
175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500
200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000
225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500
250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000
275 0113 878.2500 833.2500
300 012C 879.0000 834.0000
325 0145 879.7500 834.7500
350 015E 880.5000 835.5000
375 0177 881.2500 836.2500
400 0190 882.0000 837.0000
425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500
450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000
475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500
500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000
525 020D 885.7500 840.7500
550 0226 886.5000 841.5000
575 023F 887.2500 842.2500
600 0258 888.0000 843.0000
625 0271 888.7500 843.7500
650 028A 889.5000 844.5000
675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500
700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000
725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500
750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000
775 0307 893.2500 848.2500
NOTE
Channel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.
1013 03F5 869.7000 824.7000
1023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean Bands
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
E-6
1700 MHz PCS Channels
Figure E-3 shows the valid channels for the 1700 MHz PCS frequency
spectrum. The CDMA channels are spaced in increments of 25 (25, 50,
75, . . . 575) across the CDMA band.
FREQ (MHz)
RX TX
575
CHANNEL 1751.2525
1778.75
1841.25
1868.75
Figure E-3: 1700 MHz PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)
. . . continued on next page
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean
Bands – continued
Mar 2001 E-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Calculating 1700 MHz Center
Frequencies Center frequency for channels may be calculated as follows:
Direction Formula Example
TX 1840 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1840 + (0.05 + 25) = 1841.25
RX 1750 + (0.05 * Channel#) Channel: 1750 + (0.05 + 25) = 1751.25
–Actual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system
frequency plan.
–Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. The
actual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard
band on both sides of the carrier
–Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA
carrier and the nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center to
center).
Table E-3: 1700 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel (Korean Bands)
Channel Number
Decimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)
Center Frequency
25 0019 1841.25 1751.25
50 0032 1842.50 1752.50
75 004B 1843.75 1753.75
100 0064 1845.00 1755.00
125 007D 1846.25 1756.25
150 0096 1847.50 1757.50
175 00AF 1848.75 1758.75
200 00C8 1850.00 1760.00
225 00E1 1851.25 1761.25
250 00FA 1852.50 1762.50
275 0113 1853.75 1763.75
300 012C 1855.00 1765.00
325 0145 1856.25 1766.25
350 015E 1857.50 1767.50
375 0177 1858.75 1768.75
400 0190 1860.00 1770.00
425 01A9 1861.25 1771.25
450 01C2 1862.50 1772.50
475 01DB 1863.75 1773.75
500 01F4 1865.00 1775.00
525 020D 1866.25 1776.25
550 0226 1867.50 1777.50
575 023F 1868.75 1778.75
E
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – Korean PCS
Bands – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
E-8
Notes
E
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix F: PCS Interface Setup for Manual Testing
Appendix Content
Test Equipment Setup F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Cable Calibration using HP8921 with HP PCS
Interface (HP83236) F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing F-7. . . . . . . .
Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . .
F
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
F
Test Equipment Setup
Mar 2001 F-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Purpose
This section covers other test equipment and peripherals not covered in
Chapter 3. Procedures for the manual testing are covered here, along
with procedures to calibrate the TX and RX cables using the signal
generator and spectrum analyzer.
Equipment Warm up
Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes
prior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. This
assures BTS site stability and contributes to optimization
accuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up, hardware/
firmware audit, and BTS download counts as warm-up
time.)
IMPORTANT
*
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)
has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.
Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,
resulting in incorrect measurements and degradation to
system performance.
CAUTION
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
IMPORTANT
*
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
F-2
Prerequisites
Prior to performing any of these procedures, all preparations for
preparing the LMF, updating LMF files, and any other pre-calibration
procedures, as stated in Chapter 3, must have been completed.
HP8921A System Connectivity
Test
Follow the steps in Table F-1 to verify that the connections between the
PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct, and cables are intact. The
software also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.
Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system
controllers, from the system before running the
connectivity software.
IMPORTANT
*
Table F-1: System Connectivity
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
–Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.
2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.
3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.
4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select Card.
5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select by pressing the cursor control knob.
In the Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.
6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it.
The software will prompt you through the connectivity setup.
7When the test is complete, position the cursor on STOP TEST and select it; OR press the [K5]
pushbutton.
8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
Mar 2001 F-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Manual Cable Calibration
using HP8921 with HP PCS
Interface (HP83236)
Perform the procedure in Table F-2 to calibrate the test equipment using
the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with the
HP83236 PCS Interface.
This calibration method must be executed with great care.
Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit of
the power meter sensor (–30 dBm).
NOTE
Prerequisites
Ensure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:
STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cable
calibration.
STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.
Refer to Figure F-1 for location of the components on the PCS Interface
and Communications Test Set.
Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step Action
NOTE
Verify that GPIB controller is turned off.
1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control System card into memory card slot (see Figure F-1).
2Press the Preset pushbutton.
3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.
7If using HP 83236A:
Set channel number=<chan#>:
–Position cursor at Channel
Number and select it.
–Enter the chan# using the numeric
keypad; press [Enter] and the
screen will go blank.
–When the screen reappears, the
chan# will be displayed on the
channel number line.
If using HP 83236B:
Set channel frequency:
–Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.
–Select User Defined Frequency.
–Go Back to Previous Menu.
–Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency and
enter actual RX frequency.
–Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency and
enter actual TX frequency.
. . . continued on next page
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
F-4
Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step Action
8Set RF Generator level:
–Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.
–Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.
–When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.
9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:
–Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it
–Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.
–Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10 Select Back to Previous Menu.
11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:
Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:
–Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.
–Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.
–Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level
(1850 – 1910 MHz for 1.9 GHz or 1750 – 1780 for 1.7 GHz).
–Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.
12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.
15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.
16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.
NOTE
The Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitude
by adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.
17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dB
should be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meter
before connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting each
component, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor (see Figure F-1,
Setups A, B, or C). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.
SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = –1.4 dB
(B) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB
(B) Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB
. . . continued on next page
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
Mar 2001 F-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table F-2: Manual Cable Calibration Test Equipment Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)
Step Action
19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total test
setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
SExample: Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.
21 Select Continue (K2).
22 Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.
23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.
24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fields
not indicated remain at default):
SVerify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:
–under To Screen, select More
–select IO CONFIG
–Set HP–IB Adrs to 18
–set Mode to Talk&Lstn
SVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)
–Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches to
the CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.
–Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq
25 Refer to Table 3-29 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
F-6
(A)
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(A)
POWER
SENSOR
(C)
30 dB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
150 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
POWER
SENSOR
(B)
MEMORY
CARD
SLOT
20 dB / 20 WATT
ATTENUATOR
FW00292
Figure F-1: Calibrating Test Setup Components
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
Mar 2001 F-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment
Setup for Manual Testing
Follow the procedure in Table F-3 to setup the HP PCS Interface Box for
manual testing.
Table F-3: HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual Testing
nStep Action
NOTE
Verify GPIB controller is turned off.
1Insert HP83236B Manual Control/System card into the memory card slot.
2 Under Screen Controls, press the [TESTS] push-button to display the TESTS (Main Menu)
screen.
3Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select. In the Choices selection box, select
CARD.
4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select. In the Choices selection box, select
MANUAL.
5Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select OR press the K1 push-button.
6Set channel number=<chan#>:
–Position cursor at Channel Number and select.
–Enter the chan# using the numeric keypad and then press [Enter] (the screen will blank).
–When the screen reappears, the chan# will be displayed on the channel number line.
* IMPORTANT
If using a TMPC with Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) skip Step 7.
7SSet RF Generator level= –119 dBm + Cal factor
Example: –119 dBm + 2 dB = –117 dBm
SContinue with Step 9 (skip Step 8).
8Set RF Generator level= –116 dBm + Cal factor.
Example: –116 dBm + 2 dB = –114 dBm
9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dB:
–Position cursor at RF Generator Level and select.
–Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select.
–Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].
10 Select Back to Previous Menu.
11 Select Quit, then select Yes.
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
F-8
Calibrating Test Cable Setup
using Advantest R3465
Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.
NOTE
Perform the procedure in Table F-4 to calibrate the test cable setup using
the Advantest R3465. Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and
calibration must be performed at both the TX and RX frequencies.
Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
–This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and
stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.
1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display
2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.
3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key
4Select the Setup CRT menu key
5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parameters
NOTE
Fields not listed remain at default
Generator Mode: SIGNAL
Link: FORWARD
Level Unit: dBm
CalCorrection: ON
Level Offset: OFF
6Select the return CRT menu key
7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area
8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys
9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle it
OFF.
11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.
12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.
13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561L
CDMA Test Source Unit.
14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.
. . . continued on next page
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
Mar 2001 F-9
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table F-4: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465
Step Action
15 Record the power meter reading ________________________
16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.
* IMPORTANT
The Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dB
should be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before
connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting the
power sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.
17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect each
component one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-2, “Setups
A, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.
Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = –0.5 dB
(B) 2nd Test Cable = –1.4 dB
(C) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB
(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB
18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.
19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:
Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dB
This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.
20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area
21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency
22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.
23 Refer to Table 3-29 for assistance in manually setting the cable loss values into the LMF.
F
Test Equipment Setup – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
F-10
POWER
SENSOR
20 DB / 2 WATT
ATTENUATOR
(A)
(C)
POWER
SENSOR
(D)
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
(C)
100 W
NON–RADIATING
RF LOAD
POWER
SENSOR
RF OUT
POWER
SENSOR
& (B)
FW00320
Figure F-2: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465
F
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix G: VSWR
Appendix Content
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test equipment G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Setup – HP Test Set G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Setup – Advantest Test Set G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR
Mar 2001 G-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Purpose
The following procedures will verify that the Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR) of all antennas and associated feed lines fall within
acceptable limits. The tests will be performed on all antennas in a
sequential manner (i.e., ANT 1, then ANT 2) until all antennas/feedlines
have been verified.
These procedures should be performed periodically by measuring each
respective antenna’s VSWR (reflected power) to verify that the antenna
system is within acceptable limits. This will ensure continued peak
system performance.
The antenna VSWR will be calculated at the CDMA carrier frequency
assigned to each antenna. Record and verify that they meet the test
specification of less than or equal to 1.5:1.
It is recommended that the installer be familiar with the
following procedure in its entirety before beginning the
actual procedure. Ensure that the entire site is currently not
in service.
IMPORTANT
*
This test is used to test RX antennas by substituting RX
frequencies for TX frequencies.
NOTE
Study the site engineering documents and perform the following tests
only after first verifying that the RF cabling configuration required to
interconnect the BTS frames and antennas meet requirements called out
in the BTS Installation Manual.
Test equipment
The following pieces of test equipment will be required to perform this
test:
SLMF
SDirectional coupler
SCommunications test set
Prior to performing antenna tests, insure that no CDMA
BBX channels are keyed. Failure to do so could result in
personal injury or serious equipment damage.
WARNING
G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
G-2
Equipment Setup – HP Test
Set
Follow the steps in Table G-1 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step Action HP TEST SET
1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-5 to set up test
equipment & interface the LMF computer to the BTS.
2For manual VSWR testing, using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-1 (1700/1900 MHz)
or Figure G-2 (800 MHz).
–Connect the communications test set RF OUT ONLY port to the INPUT port of the directional
coupler.
–Connect the RF IN/OUT port of the communication test set to the reverse (RVS) port on the
directional coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 ohm load.
–Install the antenna feed line to the output port on the directional coupler.
NOTE
Manual Communications Analyzer test setup (fields not indicated remain at default):
SSet screen to RF GEN.
–For 1900 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier
between 1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX. For 800 MHz systems, set the
RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between 869–894 MHz for TX and
824–849 MHz for RX. For 1700 MHz systems, set the RF Gen Freq to center frequency of
actual CDMA carrier between 1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.
–Set Amplitude to –30 dBm.
–Set Output Port to RF OUT.
–Set AFGen1 & AFGen2 to OFF.
3Remove the antenna feed line and install an “RF short” onto the directional coupler output port.
NOTE
Set–up communication test set as follows (fields not indicated remain at default):
SSet screen to SPEC ANL.
–Under Controls, set input port to ANT.
–Set Ref Level to –40 dBm.
–Under Controls, select Main, select Auxiliary.
–Under Controls, select AVG. Set Avg = 20.
4–Record the reference level on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
–Replace the short with the antenna feedline. Record the reference level on the communications
analyzer and Note for as PA reference.
–Record the difference of the two readings in dB.
. . . continued on next page
G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued
Mar 2001 G-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table G-1: VSWR Measurement Procedure – HP Test Set
Step HP TEST SETAction
5Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) =PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
VSWR +ȧ
ȧ
ȡ
Ȣ
1)10
RL
20
1–10
RL
20
ȧ
ȧ
ȣ
Ȥ
6If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
7Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
8Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure G-1: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (1700/1900 MHz)
RF OUT
ONLY
PORT
RF
IN/OUT
PORT
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF SHORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
OUTPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
INPUT
PORT
FW00342
G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
G-4
Figure G-2: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using HP8921 Test Set (800 MHz)
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF
SHORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER OUTPUT
PORT
INPUT
PORT
FW00343
Equipment Setup – Advantest
Test Set
Follow the steps in Table G-2 to set up test equipment required to
measure and calculate the VSWR for each antenna.
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step Action ADVANTEST
1If you have not already done so, refer to the procedure in Table 3-2 on page 3-5 to set up test
equipment and interface the LMF computer to the BTS.
2For manual VSWR testing using external directional coupler, refer to Figure G-3.
–Connect the communications test set RF OUT port to the input port of the directional coupler.
–Connect the INPUT port of the communication test set to the forward port on the directional
coupler. Terminate the forward port with a 50 Ohm load.
–Connect the RF short to the directional coupler output port.
. . . continued on next page
G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued
Mar 2001 G-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step ADVANTESTAction
3Preform the following to instruct the calibrated test set to generate a CDMA RF carrier (RVL call)
with all zero longcode at the assigned RX frequency at –10 dBm:
SPush the ADVANCE Measurement key.
SPush the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
SPush the FREQ Entry key:
–For 1900 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
1930–1990 MHz for TX and 1850–1910 MHz for RX.
–For 800 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
869–894 MHz for TX and 824–849 MHz for RX.
–For 1700 MHz systems, set RF Gen Freq to center frequency of actual CDMA carrier between
1840–1870 MHz for TX and 1750–1780 MHz for RX.
SPush the LEVEL Entry key; set to 0 dBm (by entering 0 and pushing the –dBm key).
SVerify that ON is active in the Output CRT menu key.
SVerify that OFF is active in the Mod CRT menu key.
SPush the CW Measurement key.
SPush the FREQ Entry key.
–Push the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
–Set Preselect CRT menu key to 3.0G.
SPush the Transient Measurement key.
–Push the Tx Power CRT menu key.
–Push the LEVEL entry key (set to 7 dBm by entering 7 and pushing the the dBm key).
–Set Avg Times CRT menu key to ON. Set to 20 (by entering 20 and pushing the Hz ENTER
key).
SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
4Record the Burst Power display on the communications analyzer and Note as PS for reference.
5Install the antenna feedline to the output port of the directional coupler.
6SPush the Auto Level Set CRT menu key.
SPush the REPEAT Start key to take the measurement.
7Record the Burst Power on the communications analyzer and Note as PA level for reference.
Record the difference of the two readings in dBm.
8Calculate the VSWR per the equation shown to the right.
Where:
RL(dB) =PA(dBm) – PS(dBm)
PA = Power reflected from antenna
PS = Power reflected from short
A calculated value of –13.98 dB equates to VSWR of better than 1.5:1.
VSWR +ȧ
ȧ
ȡ
Ȣ
1)10
RL
20
1–10
RL
20
ȧ
ȧ
ȣ
Ȥ
. . . continued on next page
G
Transmit & Receive Antenna VSWR – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
G-6
Table G-2: VSWR Measurement Procedure – Advantest Test Set
Step ADVANTESTAction
9If the readings indicate a potential problem, verify the physical integrity of all cables (including any
in–line components, pads, etc.) and associated connections up to the antenna. If problem still persists,
consult antenna OEM documentation for additional performance verification tests or replacement
information.
10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining TX sectors/antennas.
11 Repeat steps 2 through 9 for all remaining RX sectors/antennas.
Figure G-3: Manual VSWR Test Setup Using Advantest R3465
RVS
(REFLECTED)
PORT
FEED LINE TO
ANTENNA
UNDER TEST
RF
SHORT
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
OUTPUT
PORT
FWD (INCIDENT)
PORT 50–OHM
TERMINATED LOAD
INPUT
PORT
RF OUT
RF IN
FW00332
G
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix H: Download ROM Code
Appendix Content
Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download ROM Code H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
H
Download ROM Code
Mar 2001 H-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Download ROM Code
ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After the
download is started, the device being downloaded changes to
OOS_ROM (blue) and remains OOS_ROM (blue). The same R–level
RAM code must then be downloaded to the device. This procedure
includes steps for both the ROM code download and the RAM code
download.
ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file
must be selected manually. Follow the procedure in Table H-1 to
download ROM code.
Prerequisite
SROM and RAM code files exist for the device to be downloaded.
The R–level of the ROM code to be downloaded must be
the same as the R–level of the ROM code for other devices
in the BTS. Code must not be mixed in a BTS. This
procedure should only be used to upgrade replacement
devices for a BTS and it should not be used to upgrade all
devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from one
R–level to another, the optimization and ATP procedures
must first be performed with the BTS in the original
configuration. The upgrade should then be done by the
CBSC.
CAUTION
Table H-1: Download ROM Code
Step Action
NOTE
ROM code files cannot be selected automatically. The ROM code file must be selected manually.
1Click on the device to be downloaded.
2Click on the Device menu.
3Click on the Status menu item.
A status report window appears.
4Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.
5Click on the OK button to dismiss the status report window.
6Click on the Download Code Manual menu item.
A file selection window appears.
7 Double–click on the version folder that contains the desired ROM code file.
8 Double–click on the Code folder.
A list of ROM and RAM code files is displayed.
. . . continued on next page
H
Download ROM Code – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
H-2
Table H-1: Download ROM Code
Step Action
! CAUTION
A ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) needs to be chosen. The
hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4. Unpredictable results
can happen and the device may be damaged (may have to be replaced) if a ROM code file with wrong
binary type is downloaded.
9Choose a ROM code file having the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type).
The hardware binary type (last four digits in the file name) was determined in step 4.
10 Click on the ROM code file that matches the device type and HW Bin Type (e.g., bbx_rom.bin.0604
for a BBX having a HW Bin Type of 0604).
The file should be highlighted.
11 Click on the Load button.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
12 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
13 Click on the Util menu.
14 Select the Tools menu item.
15 Click on the Update NextLoad menu item.
16 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download.
17 Click on the Save button.
A pop–up message indicates that the CDF file has been updated.
18 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.
19 Click on the device that was downloaded with ROM code.
20 Click on the Device menu.
21 Click on the Download Code menu item to download RAM code.
A status report window displays the result of the download.
NOTE
Data is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the
Download Data procedure to download data to other device types after they have been upgraded.
22 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
The downloaded device should be OOS_RAM (yellow) unless it is a GLI in which case it should be
INS (green).
23 Click on the device that was downloaded.
24 Click on the Device menu.
25 Click on the Status menu item.
Verify that the status report window displays the correct ROM and RAM version numbers.
26 Click on the Ok button to close the status report window.
H
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Appendix I: In–Service Calibration
Appendix Content
Introduction I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Warm up I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Delta Calibration I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Delta Calibration Introduction I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8921A Power Delta Calibration I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP8935 Power Delta Calibration I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In–Service Calibration I-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In–Service Calibration I-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
Table of Contents – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
Notes
I
Introduction
Mar 2001 I-1
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Purpose
This procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiple
carriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allows
you to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards and
recalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.
Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during a
maintenance window.
This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4–to–1 combiners.
The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at one
time. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can be
calibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remain
in service and vice versa.
Equipment Warm up
Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent
test equipment) must be performed at the site before
calibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipment
after it has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a
minimum of 60 minutes.
IMPORTANT
*
If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter)
has been replaced, re-calibration must be performed.
Failure to do so could introduce measurement errors,
causing incorrect measurements and degradation to system
performance.
CAUTION
I
Power Delta Calibration
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-2
Power Delta Calibration
Introduction
The In–service calibration procedure has several differences from a
normal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrum
analyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters are
broadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure power
during In–service Calibration since other carriers are operating. A
spectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a given
frequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is less
accurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate for
the difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrum
analyzer.
HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration
Use the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power during
In–Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value has
been calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.
Follow the procedure in Table I-1 to perform the HP8921A Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
This procedure requires two HP8921As.
NOTE
Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure I-1).
2Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:
–Measure mode to CDMA Generator
–Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
–CW RF Path to IQ
–Output Port to Dupl
–Data Source to Random
–Amplitude to 0 dBm
3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
. . . continued on next page
I
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 I-3
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table I-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step Action
5Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.
6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuring
HP8921A RF–IN port (see Figure I-2).
7Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.
8Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:
–Measure mode to CDMA Anl
–Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
–Input Attenuation to 0 dB
–Input port to RF–IN
–Gain to Auto
–Analyzer Direction to Fwd
9Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.
10 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as result
B ________________________.
11 Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.
12 Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table I-4).
I
Power Delta Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-4
Figure I-1: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP437B
Short RF Cable
HP 8921A
DUPLEX
OUT
HP437B
Power
Sensor
SENSOR
FW00801
Figure I-2: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8921A to HP8921A
Measurement HP8921A Source HP8921A
Short RF Cable
DUPLEX
OUT
RF
IN/OUT
FW00802
Advantest R3465 Power Delta
Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table I-2 to perform the Advantest 3465 Power
Delta Calibration procedure.
Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
On the Advantest R3465:
1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.
2Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
3Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.
4Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.
. . . continued on next page
I
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 I-5
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step Action
5Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
6Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
7Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
8Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.
9Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.
On the HP 437 Power Meter:
10 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.
* IMPORTANT
For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to the
component being calibrated.
11 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor,
refer to Figure I-3.
12 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.
13 Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.
15 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the Spectrum
Analyzer INPUT Port, refer to Figure I-4.
16 Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.
17 Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.
18 Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.
19 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.
20 Press the dB/div CRT menu key.
21 Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.
22 Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.
23 Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.
24 Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.
25 Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.
26 Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
27 Press the TRACE CRT menu key.
28 Press the AVG A CRT menu key.
29 Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.
. . . continued on next page
I
Power Delta Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-6
Table I-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step Action
30 Press the return CRT menu key.
31 Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.
32 Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.
33 Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.
34 Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.
35 Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.
36 Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.
37 Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.
38 Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.
39 Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.
40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table I-4).
Figure I-3: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to HP437B
Advantest Power
Sensor
RF OUT
Short RF Cable
HP437B
SENSOR
R3561L
FW00803
I
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 I-7
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure I-4: Delta Calibration Setup – R3561L to R3465
R3561L
RF OUT
INPUT
Short RF Cable
R3465
FW00804
HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration
Follow the procedure in Table I-3 to perform the HP8935 Power Delta
Calibration procedure.
Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (see
Figure I-5).
2Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:
–Measure mode to CDMA Gen
–Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency
–CW RF Path to IQ
–Output Port to Dupl
–Data Source to Random
–Amplitude to 0 dBm
3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.
4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.
5Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.
NOTE
Leave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.
6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF–IN/OUT port
(see Figure I-6).
7Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.
. . . continued on next page I
Power Delta Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-8
Table I-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure
Step Action
8Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:
–Measure mode to CDMA Anl
–Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency
–Input Attenuation to 0 dB
–Input port to RF–IN
–Gain to Auto
–Anl Dir to Fwd
9Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.
10 Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.
11 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as result
B ________________________.
12 Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.
13 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minus
the Advantest measurement.
Delta = A – B
Example: Delta = –0.70 dBm – (–1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBm
Example: Delta = 0.26 dBm – 0.55 dBm = –0.29 dBm
These examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.
NOTE
Add this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In–Service Calibration (see Step 4 in
Table I-4).
Figure I-5: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP437B
Power
Sensor
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
Short RF Cable
HP437B
SENSOR
FW00805
I
Power Delta Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 I-9
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Figure I-6: Delta Calibration Setup – HP8935 to HP8935
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
Short RF Cable
DUPLEX OUT RF IN/OUT
FW00806
I
In–Service Calibration
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-10
In–Service Calibration
This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time.
The system has no safe–guards to stop you from doing
something that will take the BTS out of service. If
possible, perform this procedure during a maintenance
window.
Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise
the entire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.
At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion
hardware when it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.
The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior to
performing this procedure.
IMPORTANT
*
Prerequisites
SExpansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and the
CDF file has been generated.
SThe expansion devices have been inserted into the C–CCP cage and
are in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.
SThe site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files have
been loaded onto the LMF.
SThe LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.
Do not download code or data to any cards other than those
you are working on. Downloading code or data to other
cards will take the site OUT OF SERVICE.
The code file version numbers must match the version
numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do
not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
The BTS–#.cdf, CBSC–#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS
must have come from the CBSC.
IMPORTANT
*
STest equipment has been configured per Figure I-7 or Figure I-8.
SAn RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss is
already known, must be in line to perform the in–service calibration.
STest equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.
SA short RF cable and two BNC–N adapters are available to perform
Cable Calibration.
. . . continued on next page
I
In–Service Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 I-11
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
SThe Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table I-1,
Table I-2, or Table I-3).
TX
TEST
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF IN/OUT
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
RX ANTENNA
PORT TX ANTENNA
PORT
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
OUT
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
30 DB
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER WITH
UNUSED PORT
TERMINATED
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
EXT
REF
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
REF FW00758
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
ANTENNA
RX
TEST
CABLE
ANTENNA
Figure I-7: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using Directional Coupler
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
I
In–Service Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-12
TX
TEST
CABLE
Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8935
DUPLEX OUT
TEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UP
RF IN/OUT
HP–IB
TO GPIB
BOX
RX ANTENNA
PORT TX ANTENNA
PORT
RS232–GPIB
INTERFACE BOX
INTERNAL PCMCIA
ETHERNET CARD
GPIB
CABLE
UNIVERSAL TWISTED
PAIR (UTP) CABLE
(RJ45 CONNECTORS)
RS232 NULL
MODEM
CABLE
S MODE
DATA FORMAT
BAUD RATE
GPIB ADRS G MODE
ON
BTS
TX
TEST
CABLE
CDMA
LMF
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
10BASET/
10BASE2
CONVERTER
LAN
B
LAN
A
RX
TEST
CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
TEST SET
IEEE 488
GPIB BUS
IN
TEST SET
INPUT/
OUTPUT
PORTS
OUT
NOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS ARE
DUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TEST
CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXED
ANTENNA GROUP.
ANTENNA
RFDS
DUPLEXER
DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER
EVEN
SECOND/
SYNC IN
EXT
REF
IN
FREQ
MONITOR
SYNC
MONITOR
CSM
REF FW00759
SYNC MONITOR
EVEN SEC TICK
PULSE REFERENCE
FROM CSM BOARD
FREQ MONITOR
19.6608 MHZ CLOCK
REFERENCE FROM
CSM BOARD
RX
TEST
CABLE
FWD
COUPLED
PORT
Figure I-8: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS
20 DB PAD
(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)
10 DB PAD
(FOR 800 MHZ)
I
In–Service Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 I-13
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Follow the procedure in Table I-4 to perform the In–Service Calibration.
Table I-4: In–Service Calibration
Step Action
* IMPORTANT
Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for a minimum
of 60 minutes.
1Set up the LMF for In–Service Calibration:
–Start the LMF by double–clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.
–Click Options>LMF Options from the menu bar at the login screen.
–Check only the applicable spectrum analyzer check box on the Test Equipment tab.
Ensure that the GPIB address is 18.
–Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.
–Click the Apply button.
–Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.
–Check the In–Service Calibration check box.
–Click the Apply button.
–Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.
2Login to the target BTS:
–Select the target BTS icon.
–Click the Login button at the login screen.
3Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:
–Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.
–Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop up
window.
–Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.
–Follow the on–screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.
NOTE
–The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.
–To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
. . . continued on next page
I
In–Service Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-14
Table I-4: In–Service Calibration
Step Action
4Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.
–To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
–Add the value computed in Table I-1, Table I-2, or Table I-3 to the TX Cable Loss.
NOTE
Be sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematics
and do not represent actual readings:
–Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm
–Example: 5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm
–Example: –5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = –5.10 dBm
–Example: –5.65 dBm + (–0.29 dBm) = –5.94 dBm
5Input the Coupler Loss for the TX tests:
–Click Util>Edit>TX Coupler Loss from the menu bar at the main window.
–Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken at
the time of BTS installation.
–Click the Save button.
–Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
–To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>TX Coupler Loss.
6Input the Coupler Loss for the RX tests:
–Click Util>Edit>Cable Loss from the menu bar at the main window.
–Add the appropriate coupler loss to the cable loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the
information taken at the time of BTS installation and input this value in the Cable Loss field.
–Click the Save button.
–Click the Dismiss button to close the window.
–To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss.
7Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.
! CAUTION
Be sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in–service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICE
and can result in dropped calls.
The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If the
numbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.
NOTE
Be sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 8, 9, and 10.
. . . continued on next page
I
In–Service Calibration – continued
Mar 2001 I-15
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT
Table I-4: In–Service Calibration
Step Action
8Download code and data to the target devices:
–Click Util>Tools>Update NextLoad to set the code version that will be downloaded.
–Check the appropriate code version in the pop up window and click the Save button to close.
–Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
–Click Device>Download Code to start downloading code.
–Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
–Click Device>Download Data to start downloading data.
! CAUTION
Perform the All Cal/Audit procedure on OOS devices only.
9Run the All Cal/Audit procedure:
–Select the target BBX(s) on the C–CCP cage picture.
–Click Tests>All Cal/Audit from the menu bar at the main window.
–Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.
–Leave the Verify BLO check box checked and click the OK button to start calibration.
–Follow the on–screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to the
directional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.
10 Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):
–Click the Save Result button on the result screen.
The window closes automatically.
11 Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:
–Click Select>Logout to close the BTS connection.
–Close the LMF window.
12 Restore the new “bts–*.cal” file to the CBSC.
13 Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC.
I
In–Service Calibration – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001
I-16
Notes
I
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT Index-1
Index
Numbers
10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-8
LMF to BTS connection, 3-5
1700 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-7
1700 MHz PCS Channels, E-6
1900 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-2
1900 MHz PCS Channels, E-1
2–way Splitter, 1-11
3C–PC–COMBO CBL, 1-8
800 MHz CDMA Channels, E-4
800 MHz Center Frequencies, Calculating, E-4
A
ACTIVE LED
GLI2, 6-23
MCC, 6-25
Advantest R3465, 3-43
Calibrating Test Cable, F-8
Alarm Connector Location/Pin Numbering SC
4850/4850E, 3-85
ALARM LED, GLI2, 6-23
Alarm Monitor window, 3-84
Alarm Reporting Display, 3-84
All Cal/Audit Test, 3-72, 3-73
All RX, 4-1
All TX, 4-1
All TX/RX, 4-2
AMR, No control, 6-16
AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, test data sheets,
A-17
Ancillary Equipment Frame identification, 1-13
Ancillary frame, when to optimize, C-1
Antenna Map, 3-80
ATP, 4-1
Code Domain Power, 4-10
Frame Error Rate (FER), 4-12
generate report, 4-13
Pilot Time Offset, 4-9
Report, 4-13
Spectral Purity Transmit Mask, 4-6
test matrix/detailed optimization, C-2
Test Prerequisites, 4-2
Test Procedure, 4-3
testing options, 4-3
Waveform Quality (rho), 4-8
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure, 4-1
B
Backplane DIP switch settings, 2-3
Bay Level Offset calibration failure, 6-6
BBX
Connector, 6-14
gain set point vs BTS output considerations, D-1
No control in the shelf, 6-16
BLO
Calibration, 3-63
Calibration Audit, 3-70
calibration data file, 3-65
Calibration Failure, 6-6
Download, 3-70
BTS
Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-14
LMF connection, 3-5
system software download, 3-3
test data sheets, redundancy/alarm tests, A-16
when to optimize, C-1
Index – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001Index-2
BTS frame
DC Distribution Pre–test, 2-9
DC Power Pre–test, 2-7
initial power–up, 2-14
Create CAL File, 3-74
C
C–CCP Backplane, Troubleshooting, 6-13, 6-14
C–CCP Shelf, 1-19
Site Serial Number Check List, A-18
Cable
GPIB, 1-9
LAN Cable, 1-10
Calibrating, 3-45, 3-56, 3-57
Null Modem, 3-34
Setting Loss Values, 3-61
Timimg Reference, 1-9
Cable Calibration
HP8921 with HP PCS
Manual, F-3
CAL File, 3-74
Calculating Center Frequencies
1700 MHz, E-7
1900 MHz, E-2
800 MHz, E-4
Calibrating
Cables, 3-56
RX, 3-59
TX, 3-58
Test Equipment, 3-56
Calibrating Test Cable, Advantest R3465, F-8
Calibration
BLO, 3-63
Cable, 1-6
data file, BLO, 3-65
In–Service, I-13
RF Path, Test Equipment Setup, 3-67
RFDS, 3-82
Test Equipment, 1-6
TX Path, 3-64, 3-68
Test Cable Calibration, 1-6
Test Equipment Calibration, 1-6
Calibration Audit Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-7
Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,
6-3
Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2
Cannot download CODE to any device card, 6-4
Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4
Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5
Cannot load BLO, 6-7
Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2
Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-9
Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Power
measurement, 6-9
Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offset
measurement, 6-8
Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-8
Carrier Measurement Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9
CDF
site configuration, 3-2
site equipage verification, 3-3
site type and equipage data information, 2-1
CDF Files, Copy from CBSC, 3-8
CDI Alarm
with Alarms Test Box, 3-86
without Alarms Test Box, 3-89
CDMA LMF, Product Description, 1-2
Cell Site
equipage verification, 2-1
preliminary operations, 2-1
types, 3-2
Cell Site Data File. See CDF
Channel elements, No or missing, 6-17
Channels
1700 MHz, E-6
1900 MHz, E-1
800 MHz, E-4
Checksum Failure, 6-11
CIO, Connectors, 6-14
CLI, 1-3, 3-19
Command Line Interface, 3-18
Format Conventions, 3-19
Logging Out, 3-23
Cobra RFDS
external housing, 1-33
Index – continued
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT Index-3
RF connector panel detail, 1-33
Code Domain Power, 4-5
ATP, 4-10
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-9
Code Domain Power Test, 4-10
Code Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4
Command Line Interface, 1-3, 3-19
Common power supply verification, 2-13
Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,
Troubleshooting, 6-3
Communications System Analyzer, 1-9
Advantest, 1-9
HP8921A/600, 1-9
CyberTest, 1-9
HP8935 Analyzer, 1-9
Connector Functionality, Backplane,
Troubleshooting, 6-13
Copy CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC, 5-6
Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-7
Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-8
Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-6
Copy CAL files to the CBSC, 5-7
CSM
Clock Source, 3-28, 3-29
Enable, 3-29
frequency verification, 3-34
functions, 3-32
LEDs, 3-33
MMI terminal connection, illustration, 3-35
Reference Source Configuration Error, 6-11
Troubleshooting, 6-11, 6-12
CyberTest, 3-43
D
Data Download Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-4
DC Power Pre–test
+27 V BTS frame detail, 2-7
–48 V BTS frame detail, 2-9
BTS Frame, 2-5
RFDS, 2-11
RFDS detail, 2-11
DC Power Problems, 6-18
DC/DC Converter, LED Status Combinations, 6-20
Device Enable (INS) Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-5
Digital Control Problems, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-15
Digital Multimeter, 1-9
Directional Coupler, 1-10
Download
BLO, 3-70
BTS, 3-25
BTS system software, 3-3
MGLI, 3-26
Non–MGLI2 Devices, 3-28
ROM Code, H-1
E
E1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4
Enable
CSMs, 3-29
MCCs, 3-31
Redundant GLIs, 3-31
Enabling Devices, 5-2
Equipment setup, VSWR, HP Test Set, G-2
Ethernet LAN
interconnect diagram, 3-14
Transceiver, 1-7
Ethernet maintenance connector interface, illustration,
3-6
F
FER test, 4-12
Folder Structure Overview, 3-13
Frame Error Rate, 4-5
ATP, 4-12
FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22
Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10
Frequency Spectrum
Korean PCS (1700 MHz), E-6
North American Cellular Telephone System (800
MHz), E-4
North American PCS (1900 MHz), E-1
Full Optimization, 4-2
G
Gain set point, BBX, D-1
Index – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001Index-4
Generating an ATP Report, 4-13
General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4
Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-43
GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) Group
Line Interface
GLI2
Connector, 6-14
Ethernet Connections, 6-14
LED Status, 6-23
No Control through span line connection, 6-15
No Control via LMF, 6-15
GPIB Cable, 1-9
GPS
Initialization/Verification, 3-36
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5
satellite system, 3-30
Test Equipment Setup, 3-34
GPS Bad RX Message Type, 6-11
Graphical User Interface, 1-3, 3-18
GUI, 1-3, 3-18
Graphical User Interface, 3-18
Logging Out, 3-22
H
LMF Hardware Requirements, 1-7
High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-11
High Stability Oscillator, 3-33
High–impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-10
HP 437B, 3-43
HP 83236 A, F-3
HP 83236A, F-2
HP 8921, 3-43
HP 8921A, System Connectivity Test, F-2
HP 8935, 3-43
HP PCS Interface Test Equipment Setup for Manual
Testing, F-7
HP Test Set, VSWR, G-2
HSO, Initialization/Verification, 3-42
HyperTerminal Connection, Creating, 3-10
I
I and Q values, B-1
In–Service Calibration, I-13
Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminary
operations, 2-1
Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3
Initial power–up
BTS frame, 2-14
RFDS, 2-14
Initialization/Verification
GPS, 3-36
HSO, 3-42
LFR, 3-39
Intended reader profile, 1-12
Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, C-2
IS–97 specification, B-1
ISB connectors, 6-13
Isolation, T1/E1 Span, 3-4
Itasca Alarms Test Box, 1-11
L
LAN
BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-14
Tester, 1-11
LAN Connectors, GLI2, 6-24
LED, CSM, 3-33
LED Status, 6-20
BBX, 6-25
CSM, 6-21
DC/DC Converter, 6-20
GLI2, 6-23
LPA, 6-26
MCC, 6-25
LFR
Initialization / Verification, 3-39
receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6
LFR/HSO, Test Equipment Setup, 3-34
Line Build Out parameters
configure, 5-4
verify, 5-3
LMF, 1-6, 3-7
Ethernet maintenance connector interface detail,
illustration, 3-6
Index – continued
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT Index-5
Installation and Update Procedures, 3-7
Termination and Removal, 5-7
to BTS connection, 3-5
LMF Operation, 3-18
LMF Removal, 5-6
Loading Code, 3-25
Logging In to a BTS, 3-20
Logging Out, 3-22
CLI, 3-23
GUI, 3-22
Logical BTS, 1-13
Numbering, 1-14
Login
CLI, 3-22
GUI, 3-20
Login Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-2
Low Frequency Receiver, 3-33
LPA, test data sheets
convergence, A-8
IM Reduction, A-7
LPA Module LED, 6-26
LPAs, Site Serial Number Check List, A-19
M
Manual
layout, 1-1
overview, 1-2
MASTER LED, GLI2, 6-23
MCC, Enable, 3-31
MGLI2
board detail, MMI port connections, 5-4
Download, 3-26
Miscellaneous errors, Troubleshooting, 6-5
MMI Connection, 3-24
MMI Connector
CSM, 6-22
GLI2, 6-24
MCC, 6-25
MMI equipment setup, 3-24
Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit, 1-9
Module status indicators, 6-20
Multi–FER test Failure, Troubleshooting, 6-10
N
NAM, Valid Ranges, 3-79
No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-18
No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specific
GLI2 BBX or Switch board, 6-19
No GPS Reference Source, 6-11
Non–MGLI2, Download, 3-28
Null Modem Cable, 3-34
O
Online Help, 1-3
Optimization
Process, 3-1
purpose, 1-4
When, 1-5
Optional Test Equipment, 1-10
frequency counter, 1-10
Oscilloscope, 1-11
P
PA Shelves, 1-20
path
RX, 1-4
TX, 1-4
PCMCIA, Ethernet adapter, LMF to BTS connection,
3-5
Pilot Gain, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-12
Pilot Offset Acceptance test, 4-9
Pilot Time Offset, 4-5, 4-9
Pin/Signal Information for ARM A Cable, 3-90
Ping, 3-14
PN Offset
programming information, B-1
usage, B-1
PnMask, I and PnMask Q Values, B-2
Power Conversion Shelf (–48 V BTS Only), Site
Serial Number Check List, A-19
Power Delta Calibration
Advantest, I-4
HP8921A, I-2
Index – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001Index-6
HP8935, I-7
Power Input, 6-13
Power Meter, 1-9
Power Meter Communication Failure,
Troubleshooting, 6-2
Power Supply Module Interface, 6-14
Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3
Preliminary operations
cell Site types, 2-1
test data sheets, A-2
Prepare to Leave the Site
external test equipment removal, 5-1
LMF Removal, 5-6
re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-8
re–connect BTS T1 spans, 5-8
Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-8
Verify T1/E1, 5-8
Pushbuttons and Connectors, GLI2, 6-24
PWR/ALM LED
BBX, 6-25
CSM, 6-21
DC/DC Converter, 6-20
generic, 6-20
MCC, 6-25
R
RDM, 6-13
Re–connect BTS IFM connector, 5-8
Re–connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-8
Redundant GLIs, Enable, 3-31
Reestablish OMC–R control, 5-8
Reference Distribution Module, 6-13
Required documents, 1-12
RESET Pushbutton, GLI2, 6-24
Resetting BTS modules, 5-2
RF
Adapters, 1-10
Attenuators, 1-10
Load, 1-10
RF Path Calibration, 3-67
RFDS
Calibration, 3-82
DC Power Pre–test, 2-11
Description, 3-75
initial power–up, 2-14
Layout, 1-33
Parameter Settings, 3-76
Set Configuration Data, 3-81
rho, 4-5
rho test, 4-8
ROM Code, Download, H-1
RS–232 to GPIB Interface, 1-8
Rubidium Standard Timebase, 3-43
RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-17
RX Acceptance Tests, Frame Error Rate, 4-5, 4-12
RX path, 1-4
S
Sector Configuration, 1-28
Set Antenna Map Data, 3-80
Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-4
Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-61
Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-62
SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-4
Shelf Configuration Switch, 2-3
Signal Generator, 3-58, 3-59
Site, equipage verification, 3-3
Site checklist, data sheets, A-2
Site equipage, CDF file, 3-2
Site I/O board, T1 span cable connection, 5-8
Site Serial Number Check List, A-18
Span Framing Format
configure, 5-4
verify, 5-3
Span I/O board
E1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5
T1 span isolation, illustration, 3-5
Span Line
connector , 6-13
T1/E1 Verification Equipment, 1-11
Span line traffic, No or missing, 6-16
Index – continued
Mar 2001 SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP DRAFT Index-7
Span Parameter Configuration
set, procedure, 5-4
verification, procedure, 5-3
Span Problems, no control link, 6-27
SPANS LED, GLI2, 6-23
Spectral Purity Transmit Mask ATP, 4-6
Spectral Purity TX Mask, 4-5
Spectrum Analyzer, 1-11, 3-58, 3-59
Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-43
STATUS LED, GLI2, 6-23
SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-22
System Connectivity Test, HP8921A, F-2
T
T1
isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4
span connection, 5-8
Test data sheets
AMR CDI Alarm Input Verification, A-17
BTS redundancy/alarm tests, A-16
general optimization checklist, A-4
GPS receiver operation, A-5
initial power tests, A-3
LFR receiver operation, A-6
LPA
convergence, A-8
IM Reduction, A-7
pre–power tests, A-3
preliminary operations, A-2
RX antenna VSWR, A-17
site checklist, A-2
TX antenna VSWR, A-16
TX BLO
Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9
Power Output Verification, A-14
Test Equipment
Automatically Selecting, 3-55
Calibrating, 3-56
Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-43
Manually Selecting, 3-54
Reference Chart, 3-44
Selecting, 3-54
verification data sheets, A-1
VSWR, G-1
Test Equipment Setup, 3-43
GPS & LFR/HSO, 3-34
HP PCS Interface, F-7
RF path calibration, 3-67
Test Matrix, C-4
ATP optimization, C-2
Test Set, Calibration, 3-53
Timing Reference Cables, 1-9
Top Interconnect Plate, 1-19
Troubleshooting
BBX Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line
Traffic, 6-16
BLO Calibration Failure, 6-6
C–CCP Backplane, 6-13, 6-14
Calibration Audit Failure, 6-7
Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement
Failure, 6-9
Code Download Failure, 6-4
Communications Analyzer Communication Failure,
6-3
CSM Checklist, 6-11
Data Download Failure, 6-4
DC Power Problems, 6-18
Device Enable (INS) Failure, 6-5
Login Failure, 6-2
MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR,
6-16
MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over
Co–located GLI2, 6-15
Miscellaneous Failures, 6-5
Multi–FER Failure, 6-10
No BBX Control in the Shelf – No Control over
Co–located GLI2s, 6-16
No DC Input Voltage to any C–CCP Shelf Module,
6-19
No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module,
6-18
No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection,
6-15
No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-15
No MCC Channel Elements, 6-17
Power Meter Communication Failure, 6-2
Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure,
6-8
Span Problems, no control link, 6-27
TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-19
TX Mask Measurement Failure, 6-8
TSU NAM
Parameters, 3-78
Index – continued
DRAFT
SCt4812T CDMA BTS Optimization/ATP Mar 2001Index-8
Program, 3-83
TX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16
TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-63
TX and RX Frequency vs Channel
1700 MHz, E-7
1900 MHz, E-2
800 MHz, E-4
TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP Backplane
Troubleshooting, 6-19
TX Audit Test, 3-71
TX BLO, test data sheets
Offset/Power Output Verification, A-9
Power Output Verification, A-14
TX Coupler, Setting Loss Value, 3-62
TX Mask test, 4-6
TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,
illustration, 4-7
TX OUT connection, 4-2
TX Output Acceptance Tests
Code domain power, 4-5, 4-10
introduction, 4-5
Pilot Time Offset, 4-5, 4-9
Spectral purity TX mask, 4-5, 4-6
Waveform quality (rho), 4-5, 4-8
TX Path, calibration, 3-64
TX path, 1-4
audit, 3-71
calibration, 3-68
U
Updating LMF Files, 5-6
UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-5
V
Verification of Test Equipment, data sheets, A-1
Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-3
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. See VSWR
VSWR
Advantest Test Set, G-4
Calculation, G-3, G-5
Equation, G-3, G-5
manual test setup detail
Advantest illustration, G-6
HP illustration, G-3, G-4
required test equipment, G-1
transmit and receive antenna, G-1
W
Walsh channels, 4-10
Warm–up, 1-6
Waveform Quality (rho), 4-5
Waveform Quality (rho) ATP, 4-8
When to optimize
Ancillary – table, C-1
BTS, C-1
inter–frame cabling, C-2
X
Xircom Model PE3–10B2, LMF to BTS connection,
3-5

Navigation menu